OWNER’S
MANUAL
Toledo
6JA012720BC
Inglés
6JA012720BC (11.14)
Toledo Inglés (11.14)
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-
stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason
no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.14
About this manual
This manual contains a description of the
equipment supplied with the vehicle at the
time this manual was published. Some of the
units described herein will not be available
until a later date or are only available in cer-
tain markets.
Because this is a general manual for the
TOLEDO, some of the equipment and func-
tions that are described in this manual are
not included in all types or variants of the
model; they may vary or be modified depend-
ing on the technical requirements and on the
market; this is in no way deceptive advertis-
ing.
The illustrations are intended as a general
guide and may vary from the equipment fitted
in your vehicle in some details.
The steering indications (left, right, forward,
reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the
normal driving movements of the vehicle ex-
cept when otherwise indicated.
*
The equipment marked with an aster-
isk* is fitted as standard only in certain
versions, and is only supplied as op-
tional extras for some versions, or are
only offered in certain countries.
® All registered marks are indicated with
®. Although the copyright symbol does
not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.
>> The section is continued on the follow-
ing page.
WARNING
Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-
mation on safety. They warn you about possi-
ble dangers of accident or injury.
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to
potential sources of damage to your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-
vant information concerning environmental
protection.
Note
Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-
nal information.
This manual is divided into five large parts,
which are:
1. Safety
2. Operation
3. Tips
4. Technical data
5. Alphabetical index
At the end of this manual, there is a detailed
alphabetical index that will help you quickly
find the information you require.
Foreword
This Instruction Manual and its correspond-
ing supplements should be read carefully to
familiarise yourself with your vehicle.
Besides the regular care and maintenance of
the vehicle, its correct handling will help pre-
serve its value.
For safety reasons, always note the informa-
tion concerning accessories, modifications
and part replacements.
If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board
documentation to the new owner, as it
should be kept with the vehicle.
You can access the information in this man-
ual using:
●
Thematic table of contents that follows the
manual’s general chapter structure
●
Alphabetical index with many terms and
synonyms to help you find information.
WARNING
Read and always observe safety informa-
tion concerning the passenger's front air-
bag ››› page 25, Important information
regarding the front passenger's airbag.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Safety first! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Sitting position for vehicle occupants . . . . . . . 6
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
The reasons why we should wear seat belts . . 11
How to properly adjust your seatbelt . . . . . . . . 14
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Airbag overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Transporting children safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Instruments and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Dash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Multi-function display* (on board computer) . . 39
MAXI DOT* (Informative display) . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Maintenance interval display* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Steering wheel controls* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Electric window opening and closing . . . . . . . . 60
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers . . 68
Rear vision mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Adjusting seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . 71
Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . . . . 76
Practical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Roof rack* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Air conditioning (manual)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Climatronic* (automatic air conditioning) . . . . 93
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Brakes and brake servo systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Run-in and economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Wading and driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Braking and stability systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Cruise control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Start-Stop* System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Driving the vehicle with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Accessories and modifications to the vehicle . 122
Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Tyre control systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Winter service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Emergency locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . 161
Changing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Changing front fog light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Changing bulbs for rear lights (in side panel) . 169
Changing rear lights (in rear lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Changing bulb for the number plate light . . . . 173
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
3
Table of Contents
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
4
Safe driving
Safety
Safe driving
Safety first!
This chapter contains important information,
tips, suggestions and warnings that you
should read and consider for both your own
safety and for your passengers' safety.
WARNING
●
This manual contains important informa-
tion about the operation of the vehicle, both
for the driver and the passengers. The other
sections of the on-board documentation also
contain further information that you should
be aware of for your own safety and for the
safety of your passengers.
●
Ensure that the on-board documentation is
kept in the vehicle at all times. This is espe-
cially important when lending or selling the
vehicle to another person.
Advice about driving
Before starting every trip
For your own safety and the safety of your
passengers, always note the following points
before every trip:
–
Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn
signals are working properly.
–
Check tyre pressure.
–
Ensure that all windows provide a clear and
good view of the surroundings.
–
Make sure all luggage is secured
››› page 81
.
–
M
ak
e sure that no objects can interfere
with the pedals.
–
Adjust front seat, head restraint and rear vi-
sion mirrors properly according to your
size.
–
Ensure that the passengers in the rear
seats always have the head restraints in
the in-use position ››› page 10.
–
Instruct passengers to adjust the head re-
straints according to their height.
–
Protect children with appropriate child
seats and properly applied seat belts
››› page 24.
–
Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct
your passengers also to assume a proper
sitting position. ››› page 6.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your
passengers also to fasten their seat belts
properly.
›››
page 11.
What affects driving safety?
As a driver, you are responsible for yourself
and your passengers. When your concentra-
tion or driving safety is affected by any cir-
cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as
others on the road ››› , for this reason:
–
Always pay attention to traffic and do not
get distracted by passengers or telephone
calls.
–
Never drive when your driving ability is im-
paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).
–
Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
–
Always reduce your speed as appropriate
for road, traffic and weather conditions.
–
When travelling long distances, take
breaks regularly - at least every two hours.
–
If possible, avoid driving when you are tired
or stressed.
WARNING
When driving safety is impaired during a trip,
the risk of injury and accidents increases.
Safety equipment
Never put your safety or the safety of your
passengers in danger. In the event of an acci-
dent, the safety equipment may reduce the
»
5
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Safety
risk of injury. The following list includes most
of the safety equipment in your SEAT:
●
Three-point seat belts
●
belt tension limiters for the front and rear
side seats,
●
Belt tensioners for the front seats
●
Belt height adjustment for the front seats
●
Front airbags
●
Side airbags in the front seat backrests
●
Side airbags in the rear seat backrests*
●
Head-protection airbags
●
Active front head restraints*
●
“ISOFIX” anchor points for child seats in
the rear side seats with the “ISOFIX” system,
●
Height-adjustable front head restraints
●
Rear head restraints with in-use position
and non-use position
●
Adjustable steering column
The safety equipment mentioned above
works together to provide you and your pas-
sengers with the best possible protection in
the event of an accident. However, these
safety systems can only be effective if you
and your passengers are sitting in a correct
position and use this equipment properly.
Safety is everyone's business!
Sitting position for vehicle
occupants
Correct sitting position for driver
Fig. 1 The proper distance between driver
and steering wheel
Fig. 2 Correct head restraint position for the
driver.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accident, we recom-
mend the following adjustments for the driv-
er:
–
Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a
distance of at least 25 cm between the
steering wheel and the centre of your chest
››› Fig. 1
.
–
Mo
v
e the driver seat forwards or backwards
so that you are able to press the accelera-
tor, brake and clutch pedals to the floor
with your knees still slightly angled ›››
.
–
Ensure that you can reach the highest point
of the steering wheel.
–
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
edge is at the same level as the top of your
head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head ››› Fig. 2
.
–
Mo
v
e the seat backrest to an upright posi-
tion so that your back rests completely
against it.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 11.
–
Keep both feet in the footwell so that you
have the vehicle under control at all times.
Adjustment of the driver seat ››› page 72.
WARNING
●
An incorrect sitting position of the driver
can lead to severe injuries.
●
Adjust the driver seat so that there is at
least 25 cm distance between the centre of
6
Safe driving
the chest and the centre of the steering
wheel ››› Fig. 1. If you are sitting closer than
25 cm, the airb
ag system cannot protect you
properly.
●
If your physical constitution prevents you
from maintaining the minimum distance of 25
cm, contact a specialised workshop. The
workshop will help you decide if special spe-
cific modifications are necessary.
●
When driving, always hold the steering
wheel with both hands on the outside of the
ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions.
This reduces the risk of injury when the driver
airbag is triggered.
●
Never hold the steering wheel at the 12
o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g.
in the centre of the steering wheel). In such
cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sus-
tain injuries to the arms, hands and head.
●
To reduce the risk of injury to the driver
during sudden braking manoeuvres or an ac-
cident, never drive with the backrest tilted far
back! The airbag system and seat belts can
only provide optimal protection when the
backrest is in an upright position and the
driver is wearing his or her seat belt correct-
ly.
●
Adjust the head restraint properly to ach-
ieve optimal protection.
Adjusting the steering wheel position
Fig. 3 Adjustable steering wheel: lever be-
neath steering column/safe distance from
steering wheel.
The steering wheel can be adjusted vertically
and horizontally.
–
First adjust the position of the driver seat
››› page 71, Adjusting seats and head re-
straints
.
–
P
u
ll down the lever located below the steer-
ing wheel ››› Fig. 3 .
–
Adjust the steering wheel vertically or hori-
zontally.
–
Pull the lever upwards as far as it will go.
Correct sitting position for front
passenger
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accident, we recom-
mend the following adjustments for the front
passenger:
–
Move the front passenger seat back as far
as possible ››› .
–
Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-
tion so that your back rests completely
against it.
–
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
edge is at the same level as the top of your
head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head
›››
page 8.
–
Always keep both feet in the footwell in
front of the front passenger seat.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely
›››
page 11.
It is possible to deactivate the front passen-
ger airbag in
exceptional circumstances
›
›
›
page 22.
Adjusting the front passenger seat
›››
page 72.
WARNING
●
An incorrect sitting position of the front
passenger can lead to severe injuries.
●
Adjust the front passenger seat so that
there is at least 25 cm between your chest
»
7
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Safety
and the dash panel. If you are sitting closer
than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect
you properly.
●
If your physical constitution prevents you
from maintaining the minimum distance of 25
cm, contact a specialised workshop. The
workshop will help you decide if special spe-
cific modifications are necessary.
●
Always keep your feet in the footwell when
the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the
dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An
incorrect sitting position exposes you to an
increased risk of injury in case of a sudden
braking or an accident. If the airbag is trig-
gered, you could sustain severe injuries due
to an incorrect sitting position.
●
To reduce the risk of injury to the front pas-
senger in events such as sudden braking ma-
noeuvres or an accident, never travel with the
backrest tilted far back! The airbag system
and seat belts can only provide optimal pro-
tection when the backrest is in an upright po-
sition and the front passenger is wearing his
or her seat belt properly. The further the seat
backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater
the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning
of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting po-
sition!
●
Adjust the head restraint correctly in order
to achieve maximum protection.
Correct sitting position for passengers
in the rear seats
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident,
passengers on the rear seat bench must con-
sider the following:
–
Sit up straight.
–
Adjust the head restraint to the correct po-
sition ››› page 10.
–
Alw
ays keep both feet in the footwell in
front of the rear seat.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely
›››
page 11.
–
Use an appropriate child restraint system
when you take children in the vehicle
›››
page 24.
WARNING
●
If the passengers in the rear seats are not
sitting properly, they could sustain severe in-
juries.
●
Adjust the head restraint correctly in order
to achieve maximum protection.
●
Seat belts can only provide optimal protec-
tion when seat backrests are in an upright
position and the vehicle occupants are wear-
ing their seat belts correctly. If passengers In
the rear seats are not sitting in an upright po-
sition, the risk of injury due to incorrect posi-
tioning of the seat belt increases.
Correct adjustment of front seat head
restraints
Fig. 4 Correctly adjusted head restraint as
viewed from the front and the side.
Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-
portant part of passenger protection and can
reduce the risk of injuries in most accident
situations.
–
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
edge is, as far as possible, at the same lev-
el as the top of your head, or at the very
least, at eye level ››› Fig. 4
.
Adju
s
ting the head restraints ››› page 72
Active head restraints*
Vehicle occupants are pressed into their
seats during a rear end collision. The result-
ing body pressure on the seat backrest acti-
vates the active head restraint* on the front
seat, which moves rapidly forwards and
8
Safe driving
upwards at the same time. This movement re-
duces the distance between the occupant's
head and the head restraint, thus reducing
the risk of injuries such as whiplash.
WARNING
●
Travelling with the head restraints removed
or improperly adjusted increases the risk of
severe injuries. An improper adjustment of
the head restraints may cause death in an ac-
cident and increase the risk of suffering inju-
ries during abrupt braking actions or unex-
pected manoeuvres.
●
The head restraints must always be adjus-
ted according to the height of the passenger.
Note
The active head restraints* could also be trig-
gered if a vehicle occupant applies a high lev-
el of pressure to the seat backrest (e.g. by
“falling” back into the seat when entering the
vehicle) or if pressure is applied to a front
seat head restraint from the rear. This acci-
dental activation is, however, not dangerous,
as the active head restraints will return to the
original position immediately and are thus
once again ready.
Examples of incorrect sitting
positions
Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-
ly when the belt webs are properly posi-
tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substan-
tially reduce the protective function of seat
belts and increase the risk of injury due to in-
correct seat belt position. As the driver, you
are responsible for all passengers, especially
children.
–
Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect
sitting position in the vehicle while travel-
ling ››› .
The following list contains examples of sit-
ting positions that could be dangerous for all
vehicle occupants. The list is not complete,
but we would like to make you aware of this
issue.
Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:
●
Never stand in the vehicle.
●
Never stand on the seats.
●
Never kneel on the seats.
●
Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.
●
Never lean against the dash panel.
●
Never lie on the rear bench.
●
Never sit on the front edge of a seat.
●
Never sit sideways.
●
Never lean out of a window.
●
Never put your feet out of a window.
●
Never put your feet on the dash panel.
●
Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.
●
Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot-
well.
●
Never travel without wearing the seat belt.
●
Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug-
gage compartment.
WARNING
●
Any incorrect sitting position increases the
risk of severe injuries.
●
Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the
vehicle occupants to severe injuries if airbags
are triggered, by striking a vehicle occupant
who has assumed an incorrect sitting posi-
tion.
●
Before the vehicle moves, assume the prop-
er sitting position and maintain it throughout
the trip. Before every trip, instruct your pas-
sengers to sit properly and to stay in this po-
sition during the trip ››› page 6, Sitting posi-
tion for vehicle occupants.
9
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Safety
Correct adjustment of rear seat head
restraints
Fig. 5 Head restraints in the correct position.
Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-
portant part of passenger protection and can
reduce the risk of injuries in most accident
situations.
Rear outer seat head restraints
–
The rear outer seat head restraints have 4
positions.
–
Three positions for use
›
›› Fig. 5
. In these
positions, the head restraints are used nor-
mally, and along with the rear seat belts,
protect passengers in the rear seats.
–
And one position for non-use.
–
To fit the head restraints in position for use,
pull on the edges with both hands in the
direction of the arrow.
Centre rear head restraint*
–
The centre head restraint only has two posi-
tions, in-use (head restraint up) and non-
use (head restraint down).
WARNING
●
Under no circumstances should the rear
passengers travel while the head restraints
are in the non-use position.
●
Do not swap the centre rear head restraint
with either of the outer seat rear head re-
straints. Risk of injury in case of an accident!
CAUTION
Note the instructions on the adjustment of
the head restraints ››› page 72.
Pedal area
Pedals
–
Ensure that you can always press the accel-
erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpaired
to the floor.
–
Ensure that the pedals can return unim-
paired to their initial positions.
–
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-
tened during the trip and do not obstruct
the pedals
›››
.
Only use floor mats which leave the pedals
clear and which are secured to prevent them
from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor
mats from a specialised dealership. Fasten-
ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must
be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop
the vehicle.
Wearing suitable shoes
Always wear shoes which support your feet
properly and give you a good feeling for the
pedals.
WARNING
●
If the pedals are obstructed, an accident
may occur. Risk of serious injuries.
●
Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor cov-
erings over the original floor mats. This
would reduce the pedal area and could ob-
struct the pedals. Risk of accident.
●
Never place objects in the driver footwell.
An object could move into the pedal area and
impair pedal operation. In the event of a sud-
den driving or braking manoeuvre, you will
not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ac-
celerator pedal. Risk of accident!
10
Seat belts
Seat belts
The reasons why we should
wear seat belts
Number of seats
Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front
and three in the r
ear. Each seat is equipped
with a three-point seat belt.
In some versions, your vehicle is approved
only for four seats. Two front seats and two
re
ar seats.
WARNING
●
Never transport more than the permitted
amount of people in your vehicle.
●
Every vehicle occupant must properly fas-
ten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or
her seat. Children must be protected with an
appropriate child restraint system.
Seat belt warning lamp*
The control lamp illuminates to remind the
driver to fasten his seat belt.
Before starting the vehicle:
–
Fasten your seat belt securely.
–
Instruct your passengers to fasten their
seat belts properly before driving off.
–
Protect children by using a child seat ac-
cording to the child's height and weight.
The control lamp
1)
on the instrument panel
lights up if the driver or passenger has not
fastened their belt when the ignition is
switched on.
If, when starting to drive, speed surpasses
25 km/h (15 mph) approx. and no seat belts
are worn or they are unfastened during the
drive, a warning sound will be heard for a few
seconds. The warning light will also flash .
The lamp goes out when the driver and
passenger seat belts are fastened with the ig-
nition switched on.
Seat belt protection
Fig. 6 Drivers with properly worn seat belts
will not be thrown forward in the event of sud-
den braking
Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants
in the proper position. They also help prevent
uncontrolled movements that may result in
serious injury and reduce the risk of being
thrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci-
dent.
Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts
correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the
belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,
the front part of your vehicle and other pas-
sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-
tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-
gy released in a collision. Taken together, all
these features reduce the releasing kinetic
energy and consequently, the risk of injury.
»
1)
Depending on the model version
11
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Safety
This is why it is so important to fasten seat
belts before every trip, even when "just driv-
ing around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers wear their seat
belts as well. Accident statistics have shown
that wearing seat belts is an effective means
of substantially reducing the risk of injury
and improving the chances of survival when
involved in a serious accident. Furthermore,
properly worn seat belts improve the protec-
tion provided by airbags in the event of an
accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt
is required by law in most countries.
Although your vehicle is equipped with air-
bags, the seat belts must be fastened and
worn. The front airbags, for example, are only
triggered in some cases of head-on collision.
The front airbags will not be triggered during
minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli-
sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air-
bag trigger threshold value in the control unit
is not exceeded.
Therefore, you should always wear your seat
belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants
have fastened their seat belts properly before
you drive off!
Safety instructions on using seat
belts
–
Always wear the seat belt as described in
this section.
–
Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened
at all times and are not damaged.
WARNING
●
If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at
all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The
optimal protection from seat belts can be
achieved only if you use them properly.
●
Fasten your seat belt before every trip -
even when driving in town. Other vehicle oc-
cupants must also wear the seat belts at all
times, otherwise they run the risk of being in-
jured.
●
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection
if the seat belt is not positioned correctly.
●
Never allow two passengers (even children)
to share the same seat belt.
●
Always keep both feet in the footwell in
front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in
motion.
●
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
●
The seat belt must never be twisted while it
is being worn.
●
The seat belt should never lie on hard or
fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.)
because this can cause injuries.
●
Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or
jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
●
Never wear the seat belt under the arm or
in any other incorrect position.
●
Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat
over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and func-
tion of the seat belts, reducing their capacity
to protect.
●
The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be
blocked with paper or other objects, as this
can prevent the latch plate from engaging se-
curely.
●
Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or
similar items to alter the position of the belt
webbing.
●
Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the
connections, belt retractors or parts of the
buckle could cause severe injuries in the
event of an accident. Therefore, you must
check the condition of all seat belts at regular
intervals.
●
Seat belts which have been worn in an acci-
dent and stretched must be replaced by a
specialised workshop. Renewal may be nec-
essary even if there is no apparent damage.
The belt anchorage should also be checked.
●
Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat
belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-
moved or modified in any way.
●
The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the
retractors may not work properly
››› page 128.
12
Seat belts
Head-on collisions and the laws of
physics
Fig. 7 A driver not wearing a seat belt is
thrown forward violently
Fig. 8 The unbelted passenger in the rear
seat is thrown forward violently, hitting the
driver wearing a seat belt
It is easy to explain how the laws of physics
work in the case of a head-on collision: when
a vehicle starts moving, a type of energy
called “kinetic energy” is created both in the
passengers and inside the vehicle.
The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on
the speed of the vehicle and the weight of
the vehicle and its passengers. The higher
the speed and the greater the weight, the
more energy there is to be “absorbed” in an
accident.
The most significant factor, however, is the
speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles
from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h
(30 mph), for example, the corresponding ki-
netic energy is multiplied by four.
Because the vehicle occupants in our exam-
ple are not restrained by seat belts, in the
event of crashing against a wall, all of the oc-
cupants' kinetic energy will be absorbed
solely by said impact.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to
50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-
ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne
(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are
even higher.
Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are
not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on
collision, they will move forward at the same
speed their vehicle was travelling just before
the impact. This example applies not only to
head-on collisions, but to all accidents and
collisions.
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the
body in a collision are so great that it is not
possible to brace oneself with one's hands.
In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers
are thrown forward and will make violent con-
tact with the steering wheel, dash panel,
windscreen or whatever else is in the way
››› Fig. 7
.
It
i
s also important for rear passengers to
wear seat belts properly, as they could other-
wise be thrown forward violently through the
vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in
the rear seats who do not use seat belts en-
danger not only themselves but also the front
occupants ››› Fig. 8.
13
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Safety
How to properly adjust your
seatbelt
Fastening and unfastening your seat
belt
Fig. 9 Positioning and removing the seat belt
buckle.
Fig. 10 Placing the seat belt in the shoulder
and pelvis area for pregnant women.
Fasten your seat belt
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if
the seat belt is not positioned correctly.
●
Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
●
To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch
plate and pull it slowly across your chest and
lap.
●
Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the
appropriate seat and push it down until it is
securely locked with an audible click ››› Fig. 9
A
.
●
P
u
ll the belt to ensure that the latch plate is
securely engaged in the buckle.
The seat belts are equipped with an automat-
ic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full free-
dom of movement is permitted when the
shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur-
ing sudden braking, during travel in steep
areas or bends and during acceleration, the
automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is
locked.
The automatic belt retractors on the front
seats are fitted with seat belt tensioners
››› page 15.
Seat belt release
●
Press the red button on the belt buckle
››› Fig. 9 B. The latch plate is released and
springs out ›››
.
●
Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls
up easily and the trim is not damaged.
Positioning seat belts
Seat belts offer their maximum protection on-
ly when they are properly positioned.
The following features are available to adjust
the seat belt in the shoulder region:
●
belt height adjustment for the front seats.
●
front seat height adjustment*.
14
Seat belts
WARNING
●
The seat belts offer best protection only
when the backrests are in an upright position
and the seat belts have been fastened prop-
erly.
●
Never put the latch plate in the buckle of
another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will
not protect you properly and the risk of injury
is increased.
●
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion. If you do, you increase the
risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.
●
An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause se-
vere injuries in the event of an accident.
●
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie
on the centre of the shoulder, never across
the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snug-
ly on the torso ››› Fig. 10.
●
The lap p
art of the seat belt must lie across
the pelvis, never across the stomach. The
seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pel-
vis ››› Fig. 10. Pull the belt tight if necessary
to take up any slack.
●
For pregnant women, the lap part of the
seat belt must lie as low as possible over the
pelvis, never across the stomach, and always
lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the
abdomen.
●
Always engage the retractor lock when you
are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1
››› page 24.
●
Read and observe the warnings ››› page 12.
Adjusting the seat belt height
Fig. 11 Location of the belt height adjuster.
The seat belt adjuster for the front seats can
be used to adjust the proper belt position at
the shoulder.
–
Press the upper part of the shoulder belt
guide and hold it in this position ››› Fig. 11
.
–
Mo
v
e the shoulder belt guide up or down
until you have adjusted the seat belt
››› page 14.
–
After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt
sharply to check that the catch on the
shoulder belt guide is engaged securely.
Seat belt tensioners
How the seat belt tensioner works
During a frontal collision, the seat belts on
the front seats are retracted automatically.
The seat belts for the occupants in the front
seats are equipped with belt tensioners. Sen-
sors will trigger the belt tensioners only dur-
ing severe head-on, lateral and rear-end colli-
sions and only if the seat belt is worn. This
retracts and tightens the seat belts, reducing
the forward motion of the occupants.
The seat belt tensioner can be triggered only
once.
The seat belt tensioners will not be triggered
in the event of a light frontal, side or rear col-
lision, if the vehicle overturns or in situations
where no large forces act on the front, side or
rear of the vehicle.
Note
●
If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a
fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is
not an indication of fire in the vehicle.
●
The relevant safety requirements must be
observed when the vehicle or components of
the system are scrapped. Specialised work-
shops are familiar with these regulations,
which are also available to you.
15
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Safety
Service and disposal of belt
tensioners
The belt tensioners are components of the
seat belts that are installed in the seats of
your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-
ers or remove and install parts of the system
when performing other repair work, the seat
belt may be damaged. The consequence may
be that, in the event of an accident, the belt
tensioners function incorrectly or may not
function at all.
So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-
sioner is not reduced and that removed parts
do not cause any injuries or environmental
pollution, regulations, which are known to
the specialised workshops, must be ob-
served.
WARNING
●
Improper use or repairs not carried out by
qualified mechanics increase the risk of se-
vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may
fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong cir-
cumstances.
●
Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or
install parts of the belt tensioners or seat
belts.
●
The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and auto-
matic retractor cannot be repaired.
●
Any work on the belt tensioners and seat
belts, including the removal and refitting of
system parts in conjunction with other repair
work, must be performed by a specialised
workshop only.
●
The belt tensioners will only provide pro-
tection for one accident and must be changed
if they have been activated.
Airbag system
Brief introduction
Why wear a seat belt and assume the
correct sitting position?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best
protection, the seat belt must always be worn
properly and the correct sitting position must
be assumed.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat
belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's
overall passive safety system. Please bear in
mind that the airbag system can only work ef-
fectively when the vehicle occupants are
wearing their seat belts correctly and have
adjusted the head restraints properly. There-
fore, it is most important to wear the seat
belts at all times, not only because this is re-
quired by law in most countries, but also for
your safety
›››
page 11, The reasons why we
should wear seat belts.
The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so
if you are not properly seated when the air-
bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-
ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle
occupants assume a correct sitting position
while travelling.
Sharp braking before an accident may cause
a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be
thrown forward into the area of the deploying
16
Airbag system
airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may
inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occu-
pant. This also applies to children.
Always maintain the greatest possible dis-
tance between yourself and the front airbag.
This way, the front airbags can completely
deploy when triggered, providing their maxi-
mum protection.
The most important factors that will trigger
an airbag are: the type of accident, the angle
of collision and the speed of the vehicle.
Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-
pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration
rate resulting from the collision and detected
by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration
occurring during the collision and measured
by the control unit remains below the speci-
fied reference values, the front, side and/or
curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take in-
to account that the visible damage in a vehi-
cle involved in an accident, no matter how
serious, is not a determining factor for the
airbags to have been triggered.
WARNING
●
Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assum-
ing an incorrect sitting position can lead to
critical or fatal injuries.
●
All vehicle occupants, including children,
who are not properly belted can sustain criti-
cal or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered.
Children up to 12 years old should always
travel on the rear seat. Never transport chil-
dren in the vehicle if they are not restrained
or the restraint system is not appropriate for
their age, size or weight.
●
If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if you
lean forward or to the side while travelling or
assume an incorrect sitting position, there is
a substantially increased risk of injury. This
increased risk of injury will be further in-
creased if you are struck by an inflating air-
bag.
●
To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating
airbag, always wear the seat belt properly
››› page 11.
●
Alw
ays adjust the front seats properly.
Description of airbag system
The airbag system mainly comprises (as per
vehicle equipment):
●
an electronic control and monitoring sys-
tem (control unit)
●
frontal airbags for driver and passenger,
●
side airbags,
●
curtain airbags,
●
a control lamp on the dash panel
››› page 18
.
●
k
ey
-operated switch for front passenger air-
bag,
●
a control lamp for disabling/enabling the
front passenger airbag.
The airbag system operation is monitored
electronically. The airbag control lamp will il-
luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-
nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system if the control
lamp :
●
does not light up when the ignition is
switched on ››› page 18,
●
turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition
is switched on
●
turns off and then lights up again after the
ignition is switched on
●
illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is
moving.
The airbag system is not triggered if:
●
the ignition is switched off
●
there is a minor frontal collision
●
there is a minor side collision
●
there is a rear-end collision
●
the vehicle turns over.
WARNING
●
The seat belts and airbags can only provide
maximum protection if the occupants are
seated correctly ››› page 6, Sitting position
for vehicle occupants.
●
If a fault has occurred in the airbag system,
have the system checked immediately by a
specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a
»
17
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Safety
frontal collision the system might not trigger
correctly or may fail to trigger at all.
Airbag activation
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within
thousandths of a second, to provide addi-
tional protection in the event of an accident.
A fine dust may develop when the airbag de-
ploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-
tion of fire in the vehicle.
The airbag system is only ready to function
when the ignition is on.
In special accidents instances, several air-
bags may activate at the same time.
In the event of minor head-on and side colli-
sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-
over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.
Activation factors
The conditions that lead to the airbag system
activating in each situation cannot be gener-
alised. Some factors play an important role,
such as the properties of the object the vehi-
cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle
speed, etc.
Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-
vation.
The control unit analyses the collision trajec-
tory and activates the respective restraint
system.
If the deceleration rate is below the prede-
fined reference value in the control unit the
airbags will not be triggered, even though
the accident may cause extensive damage to
the car.
The following airbags are triggered in
serious head-on collisions
●
Driver airbag.
●
Front passenger front airbag
The following airbags are triggered in
serious side-on collisions
●
Front side airbag on the side of the acci-
dent.
●
Rear side airbag on the side of the acci-
dent.
●
Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-
cident.
In an accident with airbag activation:
●
the interior lights switch on (if the interior
light switch is in the courtesy light position);
●
the hazard warning lights switch on;
●
all doors are unlocked;
●
the fuel supply to the engine is cut.
Control lamp for airbag and seat belt
tensioner
The control lamp monitors all airbags and
seat belt tensioners in the vehicle, including
control units and wiring connections.
Monitoring of airbag and belt tensioner
system
Both the airbag and belt tensioner systems
operation is constantly monitored electroni-
cally. Each time the ignition is switched on,
the control lamp illuminates for several
seconds (self-diagnosis) and the instrument
panel display* shows
AIRBAG/TENSIONER
.
The system must be checked when the
control lamp :
●
does not light up when the ignition is
switched on,
●
turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition
is switched on
●
turns off and then lights up again after the
ignition is switched on
●
illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is
moving.
In the event of a malfunction, the warning
lamp stays on continuously. In addition, de-
pending on the malfunction, a fault message
appears on the instrument panel display for
approximately 10 seconds and a short audi-
ble warning is given. In this event, you
18
Airbag system
should have a specialised workshop check
the system immediately.
If any of the airbags are disabled by a Techni-
cal Service, the warning lamp flashes for sev-
eral more seconds after verification and will
turn off if there is no fault.
WARNING
●
If there is a malfunction, the airbag and
belt tensioner system cannot properly per-
form its protective function.
●
If a malfunction occurs, have the system
checked immediately by a specialised work-
shop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident,
the airbag system and belt tensioners may
not be triggered, or may not be triggered cor-
rectly.
Airbag overview
Front airbags
Fig. 12 Driver airbag in the steering wheel
and front passenger airbag in the dash panel
Fig. 13 Airbag covers reacting when the front
airbags are triggered.
The front airbag for the driver is located in
the steering wheel
›››
Fig. 12
and the fr
ont
p
assenger airbag is located in the dash pan-
el
›››
Fig. 12 . Airbags are identified by the
word “AIRBAG”.
The airbag covers fold out of the steering
wheel and dashboard respectively when the
driver and front passenger airbags are trig-
gered
›››
Fig. 13. The airbag covers remain
»
19
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Safety
connected to the steering wheel or the dash
panel.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front
airbag system gives the driver and the front
passenger additional protection for the head
and chest in the event of a severe frontal col-
lision.
The special design of the airbag allows the
controlled escape of the propellant gas when
an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus,
the head and chest are surrounded and pro-
tected by the airbag. After the collision, the
airbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibility.
WARNING
●
The deployment space between the front
passengers and the airbags must not in any
case be occupied by other passenger, pets
and objects.
●
The airbags provide protection for just one
accident; replace them once they have de-
ployed.
●
It is also important not to attach any ob-
jects such as cup holders or telephone
mountings to the surfaces covering the air-
bag units.
●
Do not attempt to modify components of
the airbag system in any way.
Side airbags*
Fig. 14 Side airbag in driver seat.
Fig. 15 Illustration of completely inflated side
airbags on the left side of the vehicle.
The side airbags are located in the backrest
cushions of the driver seat ››› Fig. 14
and the
fr
ont
passenger seat as well as in the back-
rest of the side rear seats. The locations are
identified by the text “AIRBAG” in the upper
region of the backrests.
In a side collision, the side airbags reduce
the risk of injury to passengers on the front
seats to the areas of the body facing the im-
pact. In addition to their normal function of
protecting the occupants in a collision, seat
belts also hold the passengers on the front
and rear side seats in a position where the
side airbags can provide maximum protec-
tion.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat
belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's
overall passive safety system. Please bear in
mind that the airbag system can only work ef-
fectively when the occupants are wearing
their seat belts. Therefore, it is most impor-
tant to properly wear the seat belts at all
times, not only because this is required by
law in most countries, but also for your safety
››› page 11, The reasons why we should wear
seat belts.
WARNING
●
If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean
forward, or are not seated correctly while the
vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk
of injury if the side airbag system is triggered
in an accident.
●
In order for the side airbags to provide their
maximum protection, the prescribed sitting
position must always be maintained with
seat belts fastened while travelling.
20
Airbag system
●
Occupants of the outer seats must never
carry any objects or pets in the deployment
space between them and the airbags, or al-
low children or other passengers to travel in
this position. It is also important not to at-
tach any accessories (such as cup holders) to
the doors. This would impair the protection
offered by the side airbags.
●
The built-in coat hooks should be used only
for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any
heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
●
Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,
must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-
ster because the system may be damaged. In
this case, the side airbags would not be trig-
gered.
●
Under no circumstances should protective
covers be fitted over seats with side airbags
unless the covers have been approved for use
in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys
from the side of the backrest, the use of con-
ventional seat covers would obstruct the side
airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effec-
tiveness.
●
Any damage to the original seat upholstery
or around the seams of the side airbag units
must be repaired immediately by a special-
ised workshop.
●
The airbags provide protection for just one
accident; replace them once they have de-
ployed.
●
Any work on the side airbag system or re-
moval and installation of the airbag compo-
nents for other repairs (such as removal of
the front seat) should only be performed by a
specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may
occur during the airbag system operation.
●
Do not attempt to modify components of
the airbag system in any way.
●
The side and head airbags are managed
through sensors located in the interior of the
front doors. To ensure the correct operation of
the side and curtain (head) airbags neither
the doors nor the door panels should be
modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeak-
ers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag
system may not work correctly. All work car-
ried out on the front door must be done in a
specialised workshop.
●
In a side-on collision the side airbags will
not work if the sensors do not correctly meas-
ure the pressure increase on the interior of
the doors, due to air escaping through the
areas with holes or openings in the door pan-
el.
●
Never drive the vehicle if the interior panels
have been removed.
●
Never drive if the interior door panels have
been removed or if the panels have not been
correctly fitted.
●
Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers
in the door panels have been removed, un-
less the holes left by the loudspeakers have
been closed properly.
●
Always check that the openings are closed
or covered if loudspeakers or other equip-
ment are fitted inside the door panels.
●
Any work carried out to the doors should be
made in an authorised specialised workshop.
Head-protection airbags*
Fig. 16 Location of head-protection airbags.
Fig. 17 Deployed head-protection airbags.
The head-protection airbags are located on
both sides in the interior above the doors
››› Fig. 16
and are identified with the text
“AIRB
AG”.
In c
onjunction with the seat belts, the head-
protection airbag system gives the vehicle
occupants additional protection for the head
»
21
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Safety
and upper body in the event of a severe side
collision ››› page 20
.
WARNING
●
In order for the head-protection airbags to
provide their maximum protection, the pre-
scribed sitting position must always be main-
tained with seat belts fastened while travel-
ling.
●
For safety reasons, the curtain airbag must
be disabled in those vehicles fitted with a
screen dividing the interior of the vehicle.
See your technical service to make this ad-
justment.
●
There must be no other persons, animals or
objects between the occupants of the rear
seats and the deployment space of the head-
protection airbags so that the head-protec-
tion airbag can deploy without restriction and
provide the greatest possible protection.
Therefore, sun blinds which have not been
expressly approved for use in your vehicle
may not be attached to the side windows
●
The built-in coat hooks should be used only
for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any
heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hang-
ers.
●
The airbags provide protection for just one
accident; replace them once they have de-
ployed.
●
Any work on the head-protection airbag
system or removal and installation of the air-
bag components for other repairs (such as re-
moval of the roof lining) should only be per-
formed by a specialised workshop. Other-
wise, faults may occur during the airbag sys-
tem operation.
●
Do not attempt to modify components of
the airbag system in any way.
●
The side and head airbags are managed
through sensors located in the interior of the
front doors. To ensure the correct operation of
the side and curtain airbags neither the
doors nor the door panels should be modified
in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the
front door is damaged, the airbag system
may not work correctly. All work carried out
on the front door must be done in a special-
ised workshop.
Deactivating airbags
Disabling the front airbag
The disabling of airbags is only carried out in
certain cases, i.e. if:
●
a child seat is required in the front passen-
ger seat with the child facing in the opposite
direction to the direction of travel (in some
countries, due to divergent legal require-
ments, facing in the direction of travel)
››› page 26
;
●
de
s
pite the driver seat being in the correct
position, a minimum distance of 25 cm can-
not be maintained between the centre of the
steering wheel and the driver's torso,
●
installation of special devices is required in
the steering wheel area due to a physical dis-
ability,
●
if you have special seats installed (e.g. an
orthopaedic seat without side airbags).
The front passenger front airbag can be disa-
bled using the switch ››› page 23.
We recommend that you contact an author-
ised SEAT dealer for the disabling of other air-
bags.
Airbag system control
The airbag system availability is controlled
electronically, regardless of whether an air-
bag is disabled.
If an airbag was disabled using a diagnostics
system:
●
the airbag system warning lamp illumi-
nates after switching on the ignition for
about 4 seconds, and then flashes for about
12 seconds.
If the airbag has been disabled with the air-
bag switch on the side of the dash panel:
●
the airbag control lamp will illuminate
for about 4 seconds after the ignition is
switched on,
22
Airbag system
●
the airbag is disabled, signalled with the
warning lamp
which lights up with the
word placed in the cen-
tre part of the dash panel ››› Fig. 18
3
.
Note
●
Follow the current legislation in your coun-
try regarding the disabling of airbags.
●
At your authorised SEAT dealer you can find
information on which vehicle airbags can be
disabled.
Front passenger front airbag switch
Fig. 18 Front passenger front airbag
switch/warning lamp for disabling the front
passenger airbag.
The switch disables only the front passenger
front airbag.
Disabling the airbag
–
Switch the ignition off.
–
Open the passenger side storage compart-
ment.
–
Insert the key into the slot of the switch for
deactivating the front passenger airbag
››› Fig. 18
. About 3/4 of the key should en-
t
er
, as far as it will go.
–
Then turn the key gently to the position.
Do not force it if you feel resistance, and
make sure you have inserted the key fully.
–
Check, with the ignition switched on, that
the control lamp illuminates with the
word in the centre
part of the dash panel.
Switching on the airbag
–
Switch the ignition off.
–
Open the passenger side storage compart-
ment.
–
Insert the key into the slot of the switch for
deactivating the front passenger airbag
››› Fig. 18. About 3/4 of the key should en-
ter, as far as it will go.
–
Then turn the key gently to the position.
Do not force it if you feel resistance, and
make sure you have inserted the key fully.
–
Close the passenger side storage compart-
ment.
–
Check, with the ignition switched on, that
the control lamp does not illuminate,
with the words in the
centre of the dash panel.
»
23
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Safety
Control lamp with the word
(front passenger airbag disabled)
If the front passenger front airbag is disa-
bled, after switching on the ignition, the con-
trol lamp will illuminate for several seconds,
then it will switch off for about 1 s and then
switch on again.
If the control lamp is flashing, there is a fault
in the disabling of the airbag system ›››
.
Please go immediately to an Official Service.
WARNING
●
The driver of the vehicle is responsible for
disabling or switching on the airbag.
●
Always switch off the ignition before disa-
bling the front passenger airbag! Failure to do
so could result in a fault in the airbag disa-
bling system.
●
Never leave the key in the airbag disabling
switch as it could get damaged or enable or
disable the airbag during driving.
●
If the (airbag disabled) control lamp
fla
shes, the front passenger front airbag will
not trigger in the event of an accident! Have
the system immediately checked by an Offi-
cial Service.
Transporting children safety
Safety for children
Introduction
For safety reasons, as we have learned from
accident statistics, we recommend that chil-
dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear
seats. Depending on their age, height and
weight, children travelling in rear seats must
use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-
sons, the child seat should be installed in the
rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or
in the centre back seat.
The physical laws involved and the forces
acting in a collision apply also to children
›››
page 13
. But unlike adults, children do not
h
av
e fully developed muscle and bone struc-
tures. This means that children are subject to
a greater risk of injury.
To reduce the risk of injuries, children must
always use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety prod-
ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-
gramme, which includes systems for all ages
made by “Peke” (not for all countries).
These systems have been especially de-
signed and approved, complying with the
ECE-R44. regulation.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
observe any statutory requirements when in-
stalling and using child seats. Always read
and note ››› page 25.
We recommend you always carry the manu-
facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-
gether with the on-board documentation.
24
Transporting children safety
Important information regarding the
front passenger's airbag
Fig. 19 Passenger's side sun visor: airbag
sticker.
Fig. 20 On the rear frame of the passenger
side door: airbag sticker.
A sticker with important information about
the passenger airbag is located on the pas-
senger's sun visor and/or on the passenger
side door frame. Read and always observe
the safety information included in the follow-
ing chapters:
●
Safety distance with respect to the passen-
ger airbag ››› page 16, Why wear a seat belt
and assume the correct sitting position?.
●
Objects between the passenger and the
passenger side airbag ››› in Front airbags
on page 20
.
The p
a
ssenger side front airbag, when ena-
bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing
backward since the airbag can strike the seat
with such force that it can cause serious or
fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old
should always travel on the rear seat.
Therefore we strongly recommend you to
transport children on the rear seats. This is
the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-
ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-
bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 22.
When transporting children, use a child seat
suitable for the age and size of each child
››› page 24.
WARNING
●
If a child seat is secured to the front pas-
senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-
ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an
accident increases.
●
An inflating front passenger airbag can
strike the rear-facing child seat and project it
with great force against the door, the roof or
the backrest.
●
Never install a child seat facing backwards
on the front passenger seat unless the front
passenger front airbag has been disabled.
Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child!
However, if it is necessary, in exceptional ca-
ses, to transport a child in the front passen-
ger seat, the front passenger front airbag
must always be disabled ››› page 22. If the
front passenger seat has a height adjustment
option, move it to the highest position.
●
For those vehicles that do not include a key
lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehi-
cle must be taken to a technical service.
●
All vehicle occupants, especially children,
must assume the proper sitting position and
be properly belted in while travelling.
●
Never hold children or babies on your lap,
this can result in potentially fatal injuries to
the child!
●
Never allow a child to be transported in a
vehicle without being properly secured, or to
stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling.
In an accident, the child could be flung
through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal in-
juries to themselves and to the other vehicle
occupants.
●
If children assume an improper sitting posi-
tion when the vehicle is moving, they expose
themselves to greater risk of injury in the
event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an
accident. This is particularly important if the
child is travelling on the front passenger seat
»
25
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Safety
and the airbag system is triggered in an acci-
dent; as this could cause serious injury or
even death.
●
A suitable child seat can protect your child!
●
Never leave a child alone in the child seat
or inside the vehicle because depending on
the season, very high temperatures may be
reached inside a parked vehicle, which could
be fatal.
●
Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall
must not wear a normal seat belt without a
child seat, as this could cause injuries to the
abdominal and neck areas during a sudden
braking manoeuvre or in an accident.
●
Only one child may occupy a child seat
››› page 26, Child seats.
Child seats
Categorisation of child seats into
groups
Use only child seats that are officially ap-
proved and suitable for the child.
Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-
R 44. ECE-R stands for: Economic Commis-
sion for Europe Regulation.
The child seats are grouped into 5 catego-
ries:
Group 0: Up to 10 kg (up to around 9
months)
Group 0+
: Up to 13 kg (up to around 18
months)
Gr
oup 1
: From 9 to 18 kg (up to around 4
years old)
Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7
years old)
Group 3: From 22 to 36 kg (over around 7
years old)
Child seats that have been tested and ap-
proved under the ECE R44 standard bear the
test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle
with the test number below it).
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
observe any statutory requirements when in-
stalling and using child seats.
We recommend you to always include the
manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual
together with the on-board documentation.
SEAT recommends you use child seats from
the Original Accessories Catalogue. These
child seats have been designed and tested
for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the
right child seat for your model and age group
at SEAT dealers.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and
warnings concerning the use of child seats
››› page 25.
Possible ways to secure child seats
You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or
front passenger seat in the following ways:
●
Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured
with a se
at belt.
●
Child seats for groups 0, 0+ and 1 can be
fa
stened without seatbelts, using the “ISO-
FIX” and Top Tether* system, using the “ISO-
FIX” and Top Tether* securing rings
›››
page 27.
Category Weight
Seat locations
Front
passen-
ger
Rear
outer
Rear
centre
Group 0 <10 kg U* U/L U
Group
0+
<13 kg U* U/L U
Group 1 9-18 kg U* U/L U
Group
2/3
15-36
kg
U* U U
26
Transporting children safety
Suitable for universal approved restrain-
ing systems for use in this age category
(universal retention systems are those
fitted using the adult seat belt).
Move the front passenger seat as far
back as possible, as high as possible
and always disable the airbag.
Suitable for retention systems using the
“ISOFIX” and Top Tether* anchors.
WARNING
●
When travelling, children must be secured
in the vehicle with a restraint system suitable
for age, weight and size.
●
Read and always observe information and
warnings concerning the use of child seats
››› page 25.
Child seats fastened with the
“ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system
Fig. 21 ISOFIX securing rings.
U:
*:
L:
Fig. 22 Top Tether* securing ring.
Child seats with the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether*
system can be secured quickly, easily and
safely on the rear outer seats.
When removing or fitting the child seat,
please be sure to follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
–
Move the rear seat as far to the rear as it
will go.
–
Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re-
taining rings until the child seat can be
heard to engage. If the child seat is equip-
ped with Top Tether* anchor points, secure
it to the correspondent ring. Observe the
manufacturer's instructions.
–
Pull on both sides of the child seat to en-
sure that it is secure.
Two
“ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on
e
ac
h rear seat. In some vehicles, the rings
are secured to the seat frame and, in others,
they are secured to the rear floor. Access to
the “ISOFIX” rings is between the rear seat
backrest and the seat cushioning. The Top
Tether* rings are located at the rear of the
backrests of the rear seats (behind the seat
backrest or in the boot).
Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*
attachment system are available from Techni-
cal Services.
WARNING
●
The retaining rings are designed only for
use with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system
child seats.
●
Never secure other child seats that do not
have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* system, or
retaining belts or objects to the fastening
rings - this can result in potentially fatal inju-
ries to the child.
●
Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-
rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* se-
curing rings.
27
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Fig. 23 Interior.
28
Controls and displays
Operation
Controls and displays
Overview
Electric window controls . . . . . . . . . . 60
Control for adjusting electric exteri-
or mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Multifunction switch lever:
–
Turn signals, headlights, parking
lights, headlight flasher . . . . . . . . 63
–
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Steering wheel:
–
With horn
–
With the driver front airbag . . . . . . 19
–
With controls for audio, naviga-
tion system and telephone . . . . . . 46
General instrument panel: instru-
ments and warning lamps . . . . . . . . 29
Multifunction switch lever:
–
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . 39
–
Windscreen wipers and wind-
screen washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Depending on the equipment:
–
Audio system
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
–
Navigation system
Hazard warning lights switch . . . . . . 65
Control lamp for front passenger
airbag deactivated warning lamp . . 23
Front passenger airbag switch . . . . 23
Passenger side storage compart-
ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Light switch and main lights range
control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61, 62
Bonnet release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Fuse compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Steering column adjustment lever . 7
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Driver seat heating control . . . . . . . . 73
ASR switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Depending on the equipment:
–
Gear lever (manual gearbox) . . . . 100
–
Selector lever (automatic gear-
box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Depending on the equipment:
–
Drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
–
Ashtray holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Glove compartment/storage com-
partment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Heated rear window control . . . . . . . 67
Passenger seat heating control . . . . 73
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Depending on the equipment:
–
Heating controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
–
Air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . 90
–
Climatronic controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Note
The location of the controls of right-hand
drive cars differs slightly from the location
shown here ››› Fig. 23. However, the symbols
corr
espond to the respective controls.
28
29
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Instruments and warning lamps
Dash
General instrument panel
Fig. 24 General dash panel.
Rev counter ››› page 31
Digital display:
–
with trip counter ››› page 32
–
with service interval display
››› page 45
–
with digital clock ››› page 32
–
with multifunction display ››› page 39
–
with informative digital display
››› page 43
–
with outside temperature indicator
››› page 40
Speedometer ››› page 31
1
2
3
Coolant temperature indicator
››› page 31
Control for selecting the mode:
–
adjust hours/minutes
–
activate/deactivate according to speed
in mph or km/h respectively
–
service intervals – show the days and
kilometres (miles) remaining
Switch for:
–
delete trip counter
–
reset the service intervals
–
adjust hours/minutes
4
5
6
–
activate/deactivate the selected mode
Fuel reserve indicator ››› page 31
WARNING
●
Always keep your attention on driving! As
the driver, you have the full responsibility for
the safety of traffic.
●
Never use the instrument panel controls
when the vehicle is in motion. Do so only
when the vehicle is stopped!
7
30
Instruments and warning lamps
Rev counter
The red part of the rev counter scale
1
››› Fig. 24 ››› p
age 30 marks the area where
the engine control unit begins to limit the en-
gine speed. The engine control unit is re-
sponsible for reducing the revs to a safe lim-
it.
Before the needle reaches the red zone
change up into a higher gear, or move the se-
lector lever of the automatic gearbox to D.
In order to drive at an optimum RPM, follow
the gear change indications ››› page 32.
For the sake of the environment
Changing to higher gears in advance helps to
reduce fuel consumption and noise levels,
helps to protect the environment and benefits
both the useful life and the reliability of the
engine.
Speedometer
Speed warning
An audible warning will be heard when 120
km/h (75 mph) is exceeded. If the speed falls
below this limit, the audible warning
switches off.
Note
This function is only valid for certain coun-
tries.
Coolant temperature gauge
The coolant temperature gauge
4
››› Fig. 24
››› page 30 only works when the ignition is
swit
ched on.
Damage to the engine can be avoided by ob-
serving the indications regarding the temper-
ature zones.
Engine cold
If the needle is still on the left of the scale,
the engine has not yet reached operating
temperature. Avoid high engine speeds, hard
acceleration and subjecting the engine to
high loads.
Operating temperature zone
When the needle has reached the central part
of the scale, this means the engine has
reached operating temperature. Running the
engine at full throttle and the high tempera-
tures involved can cause the needle to be
positioned in the zone on the right.
CAUTION
The additional headlights and other parts
placed in front of the fresh air inlets reduce
the effect of engine cooling. With high out-
side temperatures and engine speeds a risk
becomes present of the engine overheating.
››› page 35, Coolant level and temperature
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge
7
›››
Fig. 24
›
›
›
page 30 oper-
ates only when the ignition is switched on.
The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 55 li-
tres. When the needle reaches the reserve
area, the
›››
page 37 warning symbol illu-
minates on the general instrument panel and
an audible warning can be heard.
CAUTION
Never completely empty the tank! An irregu-
larity in the fuel supply system can cause ir-
regularities when the engine is running. Un-
burned fuel can reach the exhaust gas sys-
tem, which can cause deterioration of the cat-
alytic converter.
Note
Some vehicles come fitted with the fuel
gauge on the general instrument panel.
31
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Trip counter*
Daily trip counter (trip)
The daily trip counter indicates the distance
that has been covered since the last time the
function was reset in 100 metre sections.
In order to reset the daily distance covered
keep the button
6
››› Fig. 24 ››› p
age 30
pressed down.
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total number of
kilometres (or mileage) that the vehicle has
covered until now.
Fault indication
In the event of a fault the word
Error
will be
permanently displayed on the informative
display. Please take the vehicle to a special-
ised Technical Service to solve this fault.
Note
In vehicles equipped with an informative dis-
play, if the indicator of the second speed in
mph or in kph are activated respectively, this
speed will be displayed in place of the odom-
eter.
Digital clock
The clock is set using the buttons
5
to
6
››› Fig. 24 ››› p
age 30.
Select the indication you want to change with
button
5
and make the adjustment with but-
ton
6
.
In vehicles equipped with an informative dis-
play this can be reset from the menu, Time
››› page 44.
Rec
ommended gear display
Fig. 25 Recommended gear display.
The general instrument panel display indi-
cates the engaged gear
A
›››
Fig. 25
.
In or
der t
o optimally reduce the fuel con-
sumption, the recommended gear is dis-
played on the screen.
If the control unit analysis decides that a gear
change is required, an arrow appears on the
display
A
. This arrow can point up or down
indicating whether a lower or higher gear is
recommended.
Simultaneously, the gear currently engaged
is indicated
B
in the place of the recommen-
ded gear.
CAUTION
However, the driver is always responsible for
choosing the appropriate gear for each situa-
tion, (i.e. when overtaking).
Control lamps
Summary
The control lamps indicate certain functions
or faults that may be accompanied by an au-
dible warning.
When the ignition is switched on some of the
warning lamps illuminate for several seconds
for the purpose of the control systems of the
vehicle. These warning lamps must switch off
several seconds after the ignition is switched
on.
Handbrake
››› page
33
32
Instruments and warning lamps
Brake system
››› page
33
Fasten your seat belt
››› page
34
Alternator
››› page
34
Door open
››› page
34
Engine oil (red or yellow colour)
››› page
34
Coolant temperature/level (red or
blue colour)
››› page
35
Power steering
››› page
35
Electronic stability control (ESC)
››› page
35
Traction control system (ASR)
››› page
35
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
››› page
36
Rear fog light
››› page
36
Bulb fault
››› page
36
Emission control system
››› page
36
Glow plug system (diesel en-
gines)
››› page
36
Engine electronics control (petrol
engines)
››› page
36
Particulate filter (diesel engines)
››› page
37
Fuel reserve
››› page
37
Airbag system
››› page
37
Tyre pressure
››› page
38
Liquid level in the window washer
system
››› page
38
Turn signals (left/right)
››› page
38
Fog lights
››› page
38
Cruise speed
››› page
38
Selector lever lock
››› page
38
Main beams
››› page
38
WARNING
●
Failure to observe control lamps and warn-
ing messages can result in serious personal
injuries or damage to your vehicle.
●
The engine compartment is a dangerous
area. Carrying out work in the engine com-
partment, i.e. checking and filling service liq-
uids, can lead to injury, scalding, burns and
fires. Therefore the corresponding warnings
must always be observed ››› page 132, En-
gine compartment.
Handbrake
If the warning lamp lights up, the hand-
brak
e is applied. Additionally, driving the ve-
hicle at speeds exceeding 6 km/h (4 mph) for
at least 3 seconds produces an audible warn-
ing.
The informative display indicates:
Release the handbrake!
Brake system
The warning lamp illuminates if the brake
fluid level is too low or if there is a fault in the
ABS system.
The informative display indicates:
Brake fluid Instruction Manual!
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and
check the level of the brake fluid
››› page 139
»
33
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
WARNING
●
The following indications must be taken in-
to account when opening the engine com-
partment to check the brake fluid
››› page 132, Engine compartment.
●
If the w
arning lamp illuminates together
with the warning lamp ››› page 36, Anti-
lock system (ABS) , , stop the vehicle!
Go to a t
echnical service.
●
A fault in the brake system or in the Anti-
lock brake system (ABS) can lead to longer
braking distances – Risk of accident!
Fastening seat belts
After switching on the ignition, the warning
lamp illuminates to instruct the driver or
front passenger to fasten their seat belt. The
warning lamp switches off when the driver or
front passenger fastens their seat belt
›››
page 11
.
A
lt
ernator
If the control lamp is illuminated while the
engine is running, the battery is not charg-
ing.
Go to a technical service. Have the car's elec-
trical equipment inspected.
CAUTION
Additionally, if the warning lamp lights up
whil
e driving, the warning lamp also lights
up (cooling system fault). Stop the vehicle
and switch off the engine – Risk of engine
damage!
Door open
If the control lamp, lights up, one of the
doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is open.
Engine oil
The control lamp flashes red (oil pressure
low)
The informative display indicates:
Oil pressure. Switch off the engine! Instruc-
tion Manual!
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and
check the engine oil level
›››
page 136
If the symbol flashes although the oil level is
correct,
do not drive on. Do not
ev
en run
the engine at idle speed!
Go to a technical service.
The control lamp lights up yellow
(insufficient oil level)
The informative display indicates:
Check the oil level!
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and
check the engine oil level ››› page 136
If the bonnet remains open for more than 30
seconds, the warning lamp switches off. If
the engine oil is not refilled, the warning
lamp illuminates again after 100 km (62
miles).
The control lamp flashes yellow (oil level
sensor faulty)
The informative display indicates:
Oil sensor. Workshop!
If the engine oil level sensor is faulty, The
warning lamp flashes various times after
the ignition is switched on and an audible
warning is given.
Go to a technical service.
34
Instruments and warning lamps
Coolant level and temperature
If the warning lamp (blue) is lit up, the en-
gine ha
s not yet reached its operating tem-
perature
1)
. Avoid high engine speeds, hard
acceleration and subjecting the engine to
high loads.
If the warning lamp (red) is lit up or flash-
ing, the coolant temperature is too high or its
level is too low.
The informative display indicates:
Check coolant! Instruction Manual!
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, check
the coolant level
›››
page 138 and refill if
nece
ssary ››› page 138.
If the coolant is situated in the prescribed
area, the high temperature may be due to a
fault in the cooling system fan. Check the ra-
diator fan fuse and replace it if necessary
›››
page 165, Changing fuses in the engine
compartment.
If the warning lamp (red) remains lit up,
despite both the coolant level and the radia-
tor fan fuse being in correct condition,
stop the vehicle!
Go to a technical service.
WARNING
●
Take care when opening the coolant reser-
voir. When the engine is warm or hot, the
system is pressurised – Danger of burns!
Wait for the engine to cool before opening
the cover.
●
Do not touch the fan. The fan can switch on
automatically regardless of whether the igni-
tion is switched on.
Power steering
If the warning lamp is illuminated, there is
a fault in the power steering.
The power steering system functions with re-
duced power steering effect.
Go to a technical service.
Stability Control (ESC)
If the control lamp flashes, the ESC is
working.
If the warning lamp illuminates on igni-
tion, the ESC system may have switched off
due to technical reasons. Turn off the ignition
and turn it on again. Upon switching on the
ignition again, if the warning lamp has
switched off, this means the ESC is function-
ing correctly again.
If the
warning lamp is illuminated there is
a f
au
lt in the ESC.
The informative display indicates:
Report No.: electronic stability control (ESC)
or
Report No.: Traction control system (ASR)
Go to a technical service.
Further information ››› page 108, Stability
system (ESC).
Note
If the battery is disconnected and connected
again, the yellow warning lamp lights up
when the ignition is
switched on. This warn-
ing lamp must switch off after covering a
short distance.
Traction control system (ASR)
If the control lamp
flashes, the ASR is
working.
If the
warning lamp illuminates on igni-
tion, the TCS system may have switched off
due to technical reasons. Turn off the ignition
»
1)
This does not apply to vehicles equipped with an
informative display.
35
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
and turn it on again. Upon switching on the
ignition again, if the warning lamp has
switched off, this means the TCS is function-
ing correctly again.
If the warning lamp remains illuminated,
there is a fault in the TCS.
The informative display indicates:
Report No.: Traction control system (ASR)
Go to a technical service.
Further information ››› page 109, Traction
control system (ASR).
Anti-lock system (ABS)
If the warning lamp is illuminated, there is
a fault in the ABS.
The informative display indicates:
ABS fault
The brake system alone is operational in the
vehicle, without ABS.
Go to a technical service.
WARNING
●
If the warning lamp illuminates together
with the ›
›› page 33 warning lamp, ,
stop the vehicle! Go to a technical service.
●
A fault in the Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
can lead to longer braking distances – Risk of
accident!
Rear fog light
The control lamp lights up when the rear
fog light is switched on ››› page 64.
Bulb fault
The control lamp lights up when there is a
fault in a bulb:
●
for several seconds after switching on the
ignition,
●
When connecting a faulty bulb
This is indicated on the informative display,
e.g.:
Check the front right dipped beam headlight!
Note
The rear side lights and number plate light
contain several bulbs. The control lamp
lights up only when there is a fault in all the
number plate bulbs or side light bulbs (of a
combined tail light). Therefore it is advisable
to regularly check the bulb operation.
Emission control system
If the warning lamp is lit up, there is a
fault in the emission system. The engine con-
trol unit allows driving to continue in an
emergency program.
Go to a technical service.
Preheating (diesel engines)
When you switch on the ignition, the warning
lamp lights up. The engine can be started
straight away when the lamp switches off.
If the warning lamp
does not illuminate or
if
it
does not switch off, there is a fault in the
glow plug system.
If the warning lamp starts to flash while
driving, there is a fault in the engine power
control electronic system. The engine control
unit allows driving to continue in an emer-
gency program.
Go to a technical service.
Engine management system
(petrol engines)
If the warning lamp is illuminated, there is
a fault in the engine management system.
The engine control unit allows driving to con-
tinue in an emergency program.
36
Instruments and warning lamps
Go to a technical service.
Particulate filter (diesel engines)
The particulate filter eliminates soot from
emissions. The particles accumulate in the
filter where they are normally burned off.
If the warning lamp is illuminated, the fil-
ter is obstructed by soot.
In order for the filter to clean itself (if the traf-
fic conditions ›››
so permit) it is essential
to drive for at least 15 minutes (or until the
warning lamp switches off) with 4th or 5th
gear engaged (automatic gearbox: position
S) at a minimum speed of 60 km/h (37 mph)
with the engine speed between
1,800-2,500 rpm.
The warning lamp switches off once the
filter has been successfully cleaned.
If the cleaning process is not successful, the
warning lamp does not switch off and the
warning lamp starts to flash.
The informative display indicates:
Diesel particulate filter. Instruction Manual!
The engine control unit allows driving to con-
tinue in an emergency program. When
switching the ignition off and on again, the
warning lamp also illuminates.
Go to a technical service.
WARNING
●
The particulate filter attains very high tem-
peratures. Therefore, do not park the vehicle
in places where the exhaust pipe could come
into contact with dry grass or with highly-
flammable materials. Risk of fire!
CAUTION
While the warning lamp is lit up, the fuel
c
onsumption is high, and in certain condi-
tions, the engine power is reduced.
Note
●
In order for the particulate filter to burn off
soot in a correct manner, avoid carrying out
frequent short journeys.
●
Using diesel fuel with a high sulphur count
can considerably reduce the useful life of the
particulate filter. The specialised service pro-
vides information about the countries where
fuel with a high sulphur content is used.
Fuel reserve
The warning lamp illuminates when ap-
proximately only 7 litres of fuel remain in the
tank
The informative display indicates:
Refuel! Fuel range…km...(miles)
Note
The message on the display switches off only
after refuelling and carrying out a short jour-
ney.
Airbag system
If the warning lamp is lit up, there is a
fau
lt in the airbag system.
The informative display indicates:
Airbag fault!
The airbag system availability is controlled
electronically, regardless of whether an air-
bag is disabled.
If the front airbag, side airbag, head protec-
tion airbag or the belt tensioner are disabled
using the diagnostics system:
●
After switching on the ignition, the warn-
ing lamp illuminates for about 4 seconds and
flashes for another 12 seconds.
The informative display indicates:
Airbag/belt tensioner disabled!
»
37
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
If the front passenger airbag has been disa-
bled with the airbag switch located in the
storage compartment side:
●
When the ignition is turned on, the
warning lamp illuminates for about 4 sec-
onds.
●
The airbag is disabled, signalled with the
warning lamp
which lights up with the
word placed in the cen-
tre part of the dash panel ››› Fig. 18
››› page 23.
WARNING
When there is a fault in the airbag system,
have an inspection carried out by an Author-
ised Service. Otherwise the airbags may fail
to trigger in an accident.
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
If the warning lamp illuminates, the pres-
sure in one of the tyres has decreased signifi-
cantly. Check and adjust the pressure of all
the tyres
›››
page 144
.
If
the
warning lamp flashes, there is a fault
in the system.
Go to a technical service.
Further information
›››
page 147, Tyre pres-
sure*.
Note
If the battery is disconnected the warning
lamp lights up when the ignition is switch-
ed on.
This warning lamp must switch off af-
ter covering a short distance.
Windscreen washer fluid level
If the warning lamp illuminates, the level
of w
indscreen washer fluid in the tank is very
low. Fill the windscreen washer fluid
›››
page 139, Windscreen washer.
The informative display indicates:
Refill windscreen washer fluid!
Turn signals
Depending on the position of the turn signal
lever the left warning lamp on the left or
right flashes.
If there is a turn signal fault, the warning
lamp flashes at approximately double the
normal speed.
All the turn signals flash in addition to both
warning lamps when the hazard warning
lights are switched on.
Further information
›››
page 63, Turn signal
and main beam lever.
Fog lights
The control lamp lights up when the fog
lights are switched on ››› page 64.
Cruise speed
The warning lamp illuminates when the
cruise control is switched on (cruise speed)
››› page 111.
Select
or lever lock
If the control lamp illuminates, press the
brake pedal. This is necessary when you re-
quire the automatic gearbox selector lever to
move out of the positions P
or
N
›
››
page 103.
Main beams
The warning lamp lights up with the main
beam headlights or when the headlights are
flashed
›››
page 63
.
38
Information system
Information system
Multi-function display* (on
board computer)
Introduction
The multifunction display can only be operat-
ed when the ignition is switched on. When
the ignition is switched on the last function
selected before it was switched off is dis-
played.
The multifunction display data is shown on
the screen
›››
Fig. 26
›
›
›
page 39.
In vehicles fitted with an informative display
›››
page 43 the system can be adjusted so
that certain data is not shown.
WARNING
Always keep your attention on driving! As the
driver, you have the full responsibility for the
safety of traffic.
Note
●
If the second speed in mph (km/h) is dis-
played, the current speed in km/h (mph) is
not displayed on the screen.
Memory
Fig. 26 Multifunction display.
The multifunction display has two automatic
memories. The selected memory is displayed
on the screen ››› Fig. 26
.
The c
urr
ent journey data (memory 1) is al-
ways displayed when the number 1 appears
on the display. When number 2 appears on
the display, the total distance travelled is
shown (memory 2).
Depending on the equipment package, the
memory is selected by:
●
briefly pressing the
B
button on the lever
›››
Fig. 27
›
›
›
page 40, or by
●
briefly pressing the right-hand thumbwheel
on the multifunction steering wheel
1
›››
Fig. 28
.
C
urr
ent journey memory (memory 1)
The current journey memory collects data
from the moment the ignition is switched on
until it is switched off. If the journey is contin-
ued within two hours of switching off the ig-
nition, the new values will be added to the
existing trip recorder memory. The memory
will automatically be deleted if the journey is
interrupted for more than 2 hours.
Total distance travelled memory (memory 2)
The total distance travelled memory collects
journey data from any number of individual
journeys up to a maximum of 19 hours and
59 minutes and 1999 km or until 99 hours
and 59 minutes and 9999 km in cars with an
informative display. The memory will auto-
matically be deleted if one of the named val-
ues is reached, resetting the data collected.
Unlike the current journey memory, this
memory is not deleted, even when the igni-
tion is switched off for more than 2 hours.
Note
After disconnecting the battery, all the values
stored in memories 1 and 2 are deleted.
39
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Operation
Fig. 27 Multifunction display: controls.
Fig. 28 Multifunction steering wheel: con-
trols.
The button to change the functions
A
››› Fig. 27
and the button to delete the memo-
r
y
B
are located on the window wiper lever.
Selecting a memory
Depending on the equipment package:
–
Briefly press switch
B
››› Fig. 27
on the lev-
er
.
–
Briefly
press the right-hand thumbwheel on
the multifunction steering wheel
1
››› Fig. 28
.
Sel
ectin
g functions
Depending on the equipment package:
–
Briefly press the rocker switch
A
››› Fig. 27
up or down. This displays the multifunction
display functions in consecutive order on
the screen.
–
Turn the right-hand thumbwheel on the
multifunction steering wheel
1
››› Fig. 28.
This displays the multifunction display
functions in consecutive order on the
screen.
Resetting
–
Select the required memory.
Depending on the equipment package:
–
Keep switch
B
››› Fig. 27
on the lever
pr
e
ssed.
–
Keep the right-hand thumbwheel on the
multifunction steering wheel
1
››› Fig. 28
pressed.
Thi
s
way the following values of the selected
memory are reset:
●
the average fuel consumption
●
journey distance covered
●
average speed
●
duration of the journey
Multifunction display data
Outside temperature
The display indicates the outside tempera-
ture.
At temperatures below +4 °C (+39°F), the
snowflake symbol is also displayed (frozen
road surface warning symbol) and an audible
warning is given. When rocker switch
A
›››
Fig. 27
on the lever is pressed or the right-
h
and thumb
wheel
1
›››
Fig. 28
is turned, the
l
a
st function will be displayed.
Journey duration
The display shows the time you have covered
since the memory was last reset. If you wish
to measure the duration of a journey from a
specific moment, the memory must be de-
leted
›››
page 40.
The maximum time indicated by the two
memories is 19 hours 59 minutes or 99
hours and 59 minutes for vehicles fitted with
an informative display. The memory is reset if
this value is exceeded.
40
Information system
Current fuel consumption
Current fuel consumption is indicated on the
display in litres/100 km (miles)
1)
. You can
adapt your driving style to the required con-
sumption with the assistance of this indica-
tor.
The consumption is displayed in litres per
hour while the vehicle is stopped or at idling
speed
2)
.
Average fuel consumption
The display shows the average fuel consump-
tion in litres/100 km
1)
calculated since the
memory was last reset ››› page 39.
If you wish to measure the average fuel con-
sumption for a specific period, the memory
must first be deleted ››› page 40. While driv-
ing the first 300 m after deleting the memory
this value is not shown on the display.
The value is updated regularly while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
Operating range
The approximate operating range is indicated
in kilometres (miles) on the display. It shows
how far the vehicle can travel with the availa-
ble fuel using the same driving conditions as
a reference.
The operating range is calculated in sections
of 10 kilometres (miles). When the fuel
gauge enters the reserve zone, the operating
range is displayed in steps of 5 kilometres.
The operating range is calculated based on
the fuel consumption during the last 50 kilo-
metres (miles). The operating range increa-
ses when driving in a more economical man-
ner.
When the memory is reset (after disconnect-
ing the battery), the operating range is calcu-
lated with a 10 litres per 100 km consump-
tion and adjusts to represent the current driv-
ing style.
Distance
The display shows the distance you have cov-
ered since the memory was last reset
››› page 39
. If you wish to measure the dura-
tion of
a j
ourney from a specific moment, the
memory must be deleted ››› page 40.
The maximum value for both memories is
1999 km (miles), or 9999 km (miles) in vehi-
cles fitted with an informative display. The
memory is reset if this value is exceeded.
Average speed
The display shows the average speed in
km/h (mph) calculated from the last time the
memory was reset ››› page 39. If you wish to
measure the average speed for a specific pe-
riod, the memory must first be deleted
››› page 40.
While driving the first 300 m after deleting
the memory, this value is not shown on the
display.
The value is updated regularly while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
Driving speed
The current driving speed, the same as indi-
cated on the speedometer, is shown on the
display
3
››› Fig. 24
›
›› p
age 30.
Oil temperature
If the oil temperature is lower than +50 °C
(+122 °F) or if a fault appears on the oil tem-
perature control, in place of the temperature
indication, the sign – –.– is shown.
»
1)
The indication of consumption is given in kms
(miles)/litres in models for certain countries.
2)
The indication of the consumption when the vehi-
cle is stationary is given in – –.– km/litre in models
for certain countries.
41
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
WARNING
Do not rely only on the outside temperature
indicator to verify whether the road surface is
frozen. This is because with an outside tem-
perature of +4 °C (+39 °F) ice can form on the
road - Warning of frozen road surface!
Speed warning
Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is
stopped
Depending on the equipment package:
–
Press button
A
›››
Fig. 27 on the lever to
select
Speed warning
.
–
Press button
B
on the lever to activate the
possibility of adjusting the speed limit.
–
Press button
A
on the lever to select the
desired speed limit, i.e. 50 km/h. The
speed can be adjusted in steps of 5 km/h.
–
Press button
B
on the lever to confirm the
selected speed or wait several seconds un-
til the adjustment is automatically stored.
or
–
Turn the right-hand thumbwheel on the
multifunction steering wheel
1
›››
Fig. 28
and select
Speed warning
.
–
Press the thumbwheel on the multifunction
steering wheel to activate the possibility of
adjusting the speed limit.
–
Turn the thumbwheel on the multifunction
steering wheel to adjust the desired speed,
i.e. 50 km/h. The speed can be adjusted in
steps of 5 km/h.
–
Press the thumbwheel on the multifunction
steering wheel to confirm the selected
speed or wait several seconds until the ad-
justment is automatically stored.
Adjust the speed limit while driving
Depending on the equipment package:
–
Press button
A
››› Fig. 27 on the lever to
select Speed warning.
–
Drive at the desired speed, i.e. 50 km/h
(31 mph).
–
Press button
B
on the lever to set the cur-
rent driving speed as the speed limit. If you
want to change the speed limit, this will be
regulated in 5 km/h (mph) intervals (i.e.
the speed set at 47 km/h increases to 50
km/h or decreases to 45 km/h).
–
Press button
B
on the lever once again to
confirm the selected speed or wait several
seconds until the adjustment is automati-
cally stored.
or
–
Turn the right-hand thumbwheel on the
multifunction steering wheel
1
››› Fig. 28
and select Speed warning.
–
Drive at the desired speed, i.e. 50 km/h
(31 mph).
–
Press the thumbwheel on the multifunction
steering wheel to set the current driving
speed as the speed limit. If you want to
change the speed limit, this will be regula-
ted in 5 km/h (mph) intervals (i.e. the
speed set at 47 km/h increases to 50 km/h
or decreases to 45 km/h).
–
Press the thumbwheel on the multifunction
steering wheel once again to confirm the
selected speed or wait several seconds un-
til the adjustment is automatically stored.
Changing or resetting the speed limit
Depending on the equipment package:
–
Press button
A
››› Fig. 27 on the lever to
select Speed warning.
–
Press button
B
to reset the speed limit.
–
Press the button,
B
again to activate the
possibility of adjusting the speed limit.
or
–
Turn the right-hand thumbwheel on the
multifunction steering wheel
1
››› Fig. 28
and select Speed warning.
–
Keep the thumbwheel on the multifunction
steering wheel pressed to reset the speed
limit.
42
Information system
–
Press the thumbwheel on the multifunction
steering wheel once again to activate the
possibility of changing the speed limit.
If the indicated speed is exceeded at any
time, an audible warning is given. The mes-
sage
Speed warning
appears simultaneously
on the di
splay with the imputed speed limit.
The speed limit stays in the memory even af-
ter switching the ignition off and on.
MAXI DOT* (Informative
display)
Introduction
The informative display informs about the
current operational status of your vehicle.
Additionally, the screen also displays infor-
mation for the radio, the multifunction dis-
play, the telephone, the navigation system,
the devices connected to the MDI input and
the automatic gearbox ››› page 100.
WARNING
Always keep your attention on driving! As the
driver, you have the full responsibility for the
safety of traffic.
Main menu
Fig. 29 Windscreen wiper lever: informative
display controls.
Fig. 30 Multifunction steering wheel: controls
on the steering wheel.
Depending on the equipment package:
–
The Main menu is enabled by keeping rock-
er switch
A
››› Fig. 29
on the multifunction
l
ev
er pressed.
–
The menu options can be selected with but-
ton
A
. Briefly press the button,
B
to dis-
play the selected information.
or
–
The
Main menu is enabled by pressing but-
t
on
s
A
››› Fig. 30
on the multifunction
s
t
eering wheel.
–
The menu options can be selected using
thumbwheel
B
on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel. Briefly press thumbwheel
B
on
the multifunction steering wheel to display
the selected information.
The following options can be selected:
■
MFD ››› page 39
■
Audio ››› Booklet Audio system Instruction
Manual
■
Navigation ››› Booklet Navigation system
Instruction Manual
■
Telephone ››› Booklet Audio system instruc-
tions manual or ››› Booklet Navigation sys-
tem instruction manual
■
Vehicle status ››› page 44
■
Settings ››› page 44
The
Audio
and
Navigation options are only
displayed when these factory-fitted systems
are switched on.
Note
●
If the multifunction display is not operated
during 10 seconds, the menu automatically
returns to one of the higher levels.
43
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Settings
You can make certain adjustments using the
informative display. The current values are
displayed directly in their respective places
above and below the line.
The following items can be selected:
■
Language
■
MFD data
■
Time
■
Winter tyres
■
Units
■
Second speed
■
Inspec. Service
■
Factory settings
■
Back
Select the option
Back
to return to the superi-
or menu level.
Language
Here the language used to display the warn-
ing and information texts can be selected.
MFD data
Here certain data shown on the multifunction
display can be switched on or off.
Time
In this menu you can set, the time, the dis-
play format (24 or 12 hours) and changes
from winter to summer time.
Winter tyres
The speed at which an audible warning is
given can be adjusted here. This function can
be used with winter tyres, whose maximum
permitted speed is lower than the maximum
speed of the vehicle.
When exceeding the maximum speed the fol-
lowing is shown on the display:
Winter tyres max speed … km/h … (mph)
Units
The units of measure for temperature, con-
sumption and journey distances can be set
here.
Second speed
The second speed can be activated/deactiva-
ted in mph or km/h respectively here.
Inspection Service
Here you can choose to display the kilome-
tres (miles) and days remaining until the next
service, and reset the service interval display.
Factory settings
Select Factory setting to reset the values of
the informative display to their factory set-
tings.
Door, rear lid or bonnet open indicator
If at least one of the doors, rear lid or bonnet
is open, a symbol is shown on the informa-
tive display indicating that the door, rear lid
or bonnet concerned is open.
An audibl
e warning is also given simultane-
ously if the vehicle is being driven at a speed
higher than 6 km/h (4 mph).
Auto-check system
Vehicle status
When the ignition is switched on, some vehi-
cle functions such as the condition of its sys-
tems are continually checked.
The warning messages about eventual faults
in addition to other information is displayed
on the informative display. This information
is displayed together with the respective
symbols on the informative display or by
warning lamps that illuminate on the general
instrument panel
›››
page 32
.
The option,
V
ehic
le status
, appears in the
menu when at least one warning message is
44
Information system
present. The first of the warnings given is dis-
played upon selecting this option. If there is
more than one message, the number of mes-
sages is displayed on the screen, i.e. 1/3.
This means that the warning currently dis-
played is the first of a total of three.
Warning symbols
The engine oil pressure is too
low
››› page 34
Automatic gearbox overheated
clutches
››› page 45
Engine oil level,
engine oil sensor faulty
››› page 34
Engine oil pressure fault ››› page 45
Automatic gearbox overheated clutches
If the symbol appears on the informative
display, the temperature of the automatic
gearbox clutches has reached an unaccepta-
ble level.
The informative display indicates:
Gearbox overheated. Stop! Instruction Man-
ual!
Stop the vehicle in this case, stop the engine
and wait until the symbol has switched off.
Danger of damage to the gearbox! You can
continue driving once the symbol is switched
off.
Engine oil pressure fault
If the symbol
appears on the informative
di
s
play, the vehicle must be immediately tak-
en to a specialised service. Information re-
garding the maximum engine speed is dis-
played together with this symbol.
WARNING
If the vehicle has to be stopped for technical
reasons, park it a safe distance away from
moving traffic, switch off the engine and turn
on the hazard warning lights ››› page 65.
Note
●
If a warning appears on the informative dis-
play it must be confirmed by pressing the
button,
B
››› Fig. 29 ››› p
age 43 before pro-
ceeding to the main menu.
●
The symbols are displayed again until the
fault is corrected. After the first time a sym-
bol is displayed, the symbols reappear, but
without a message for the driver.
Maintenance interval display*
Service interval display
Before reaching the service interval, when
the ignition is switched on the key symbol
appears on the screen for several seconds to-
gether with the indication of the number of
kilometres (miles) remaining. The number of
days remaining until the service inspection is
indicated simultaneously.
The informative display indicates:
Service in … km (miles) or… days.
The indication of kilometres (miles) or time
remaining until the inspection reduces in in-
tervals of 100 km or 1 day.
If the service interval is reached, when the ig-
nition is switched on the key symbol
ap-
pe
ar
s flashing on the screen together with
the word Service.
The informative display indicates:
Service now!
Indication of number of kilometres (miles) or
time remaining until the service inspection
The number of kilometres (miles) or time re-
maining until the service inspection can al-
ways be displayed when the ignition is
switched on by pressing the button
5
››› Fig. 24
›
›› p
age 30.
The key symbol and indication of the
number of kilometres (miles) remaining ap-
pear on the display for several seconds. The
number of days remaining until the service
inspection is indicated simultaneously.
In vehicles equipped with an informative dis-
play this information can be accessed from
the menu, Settings ››› page 44.
»
45
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Resetting service interval display
The service interval display can be reset only
after a service message or pre-warning has
been displayed in the general instrument
panel display.
To reset the display, it is advisable to visit a
technical service, to perform the following ac-
tions:
●
reset the display memory after performing
the applicable inspection,
●
record the information in the Maintenance
Programme,
●
place a sticker on the side of the instru-
ment panel in the driver area indicating the
date of the next inspection.
The service interval display can be reset by
pressing the
6
››› Fig. 24
›
›› p
age 30 button.
In vehicles equipped with an informative dis-
play the service interval display can be reset
from the menu, Settings ››› page 44.
CAUTION
We advise against resetting the service inter-
val display yourself, given that this action
could upset service intervals, and as a result,
lead to faults in the vehicle.
Note
●
Never reset the display between service in-
tervals as this could lead to erroneous indica-
tions.
●
After disconnecting the battery of the vehi-
cle, the service interval display values remain
stored.
●
If the general instrument panel is changed
after a repair, the correct values must be in-
put in the service interval display. This opera-
tion is carried out by a specialised service.
●
After resetting the display with flexible
service intervals, the information will be indi-
cated in the same way as vehicles with fixed
service intervals. Therefore, we recommend
that a SEAT Authorised Service resets the
service interval display, who will do so cor-
rectly using diagnostics equipment.
●
For more detailed information, please con-
sult the Maintenance Programme.
Communication
Steering wheel controls*
General information
The vehicle includes a multifunction module
from where it is possible to control the audio,
telephone and radio/navigation functions
without needing to distract the driver.
There are two versions of the multifunction
module:
●
Audio version, to control the available au-
dio functions from the steering wheel (Radio,
audio CD, MP3 CD, iPod
®1)
, USB
1)
).
●
Audio + telephone versions o control the
available audio functions from the steering
wheel (Radio, audio CD, MP3 CD, iPod
®1)
,
USB
1)
, SD
1)
) and the Bluetooth system.
1)
Depending on the vehicle equipment.
46
Communication
Audio system operation
Fig. 31 Controls on the steering wheel.
Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX
A
Turn Up/down volume Up/down volume Up/down volume
A
Press No function No function No function
B
Mute Pause Mute
C
Search for last station
Short press: switch to the previous song
Hold down: quick rewind
No function
D
Search for the next station
Short press: switch to the next song
Hold down: fast forward
No function
E
Previous preset Previous folder No function
F
Next preset station Next folder No function
G
Change source Change source Change source
H
Turn Switch MFA function Switch MFA function Switch MFA function
H
Press Acts on the MFA Acts on the MFA Acts on the MFA
47
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Audio + telephone system operation
Fig. 32 Controls on the steering wheel.
Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone
a)
Navigation
a)
A
Turn Up/down volume Up/down volume Up/down volume Up/down volume Up/down volume
A
Press Mute Pause Mute Mute Mute
B
Short press: access to the tele-
phone menu on the dash pan-
el
a)
.
Hold down: redial
a)
Short press: access to the tele-
phone menu on the dash pan-
el
a)
.
Hold down: redial
a)
Short press: access to the tele-
phone menu on the dash pan-
el
a)
.
Hold down: redial
a)
Short press: answer/hang up
calls, enable/open the tele-
phone menu.
Hold down: reject an incoming
call/switch to private/redial
mode
Short press: access to the tele-
phone menu on the dash pan-
el
a)
.
Hold down: redial
a)
C
Search for last station
Short press: switch to the pre-
vious song
Hold down: quick rewind
No function No function
b)
Radio/media functionality (ex-
cept AUX )
D
Search for the next station
Short press: switch to the next
song
Hold down: fast forward
No function No function
b)
Radio/media functionality (ex-
cept AUX )
E
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
48
Communication
Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone
a)
Navigation
a)
F
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
G
Enable/disable voice control
a)
Enable/disable voice control
a)
Enable/disable voice control
a)
No function
b)
Enable/disable voice control
H
Turn Next/previous preset station
c)
Next/previous song
c)
Acts upon the dash panel
menu depending on where it is
located
Acts upon the dash panel
menu depending on where it
is located
Acts upon the dash panel
menu depending on where it
is located
H
Press
Acts on the MFA or confirms
the menu option of the dash
panel depending on the menu
option
Acts on the MFA or confirms
the menu option of the dash
panel depending on the menu
option
Acts on the MFA or confirms
the menu option of the dash
panel depending on the menu
option
Acts on the MFA or confirms
the menu option of the dash
panel depending on the menu
option
Acts on the MFA or confirms
the menu option of the dash
panel depending on the menu
option
a)
According to the vehicle's equipment package.
b)
When a call is being made, radio/media functionality (except AUX).
c)
Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.
Voice control
Fig. 33 Multifunction steering wheel: voice
control.
The time during which the system is ready to
receive voice commands and execute them is
called dialogue. The system provides acous-
tic warnings and if necessary, will guide you
through the respective functions.
It is recommended to use the Help menu the
first time that voice control is used in order to
familiarize yourself with this function.
Optimum operation of the voice commands
depends on several factors:
●
Speak slowly and clearly, as far as possi-
ble. The system will not recognise words pro-
nounced unclearly, or words and numbers in
which syllables are omitted.
●
Speak with normal voice volume, without
exaggerated intonation or long pauses.
●
Close the doors, windows and sunroof for
the purpose of dampening or insulating
against unwanted noise from the exterior. Do
not aim the air from the diffusers at the roof.
●
If you are driving very fast, it is recommen-
ded that you speak a little louder.
●
While talking, avoid making other noise in-
side the vehicle, i.e., occupants that are talk-
ing at the same time.
●
Do not speak when the system is providing
information.
»
49
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
The microphone for the voice control is loca-
ted in the headliner and is pointing at the
driver and the front passenger. Therefore, the
driver and the front passenger are the only
persons who can operate the device.
Enter the telephone number
The telephone number can be entered as a
straight row of memorized numbers in se-
quence (the whole number at once) or in
blocks (separated by brief pauses). After
each series of digits (separated by a brief
pause) the system repeats the digits that
have been recognised.
Digits 0 - -9 and symbols +
, , #
are allowed.
The sy
stem does not recognise coherent
number combinations such as twenty-three.
Voice control activation
Briefly press button
1
››› Fig. 33
on the
mu
ltif
unction steering wheel.
Disabling voice control
If the system is playing a message, end the
message by briefly pressing button
1
››› Fig. 33
on the multifunction steering
wheel
.
If
the system is waiting for a voice command,
the dialogue may be completed as follows:
●
use the CANCEL voice command;
●
briefly press button
1
››› Fig. 33
on the
mu
ltif
unction steering wheel.
Basic voice commands
Voice com-
mand
Action
HELP
After this command, the system plays all
the possible commands.
CALL A [XYZ]
This command is used to call a contact
in the phone book.
PHONE
BOOK
For example, after this command you
can play the phone book, correct or de-
lete a voice recording for a contact, etc.
CALL LIST List of selected numbers, lost calls, etc.
DIAL NUM-
BER
After this command you can enter a
phone number to call the desired per-
son.
REDIAL
After this command the system dials the
last number that was selected.
MUSIC
Music playback from the mobile phone
or other connected telephone.
OTHER OP-
TIONS
After this command, the system offers
other commands depending on the con-
text.
SETTINGS
Selection for adjusting the Bluetooth
®
,
dialogue, etc.
CANCEL The dialogue ends.
Note
●
An incoming call will immediately end the
dialogue.
●
Voice control is only possible in vehicles
equipped with a multifunction steering wheel
with telephone control (High version).
50
Opening and closing
Multimedia
AUX-IN and MDI Inputs
Fig. 34 AUX-IN input/MDI input.
The operating description is located in the re-
spective Instruction Manuals of the audio
system or the navigation system.
AUX-IN Input
The AUX-IN input is located in one of the fol-
lowing places:
●
in the centre console between the front
seats ››› Fig. 34
-
;
●
abo
ve the storage compartment in the front
centre console ››› Fig. 34 - ;
●
in the front panel of the SEAT Media System
2.2 navigation system.
The purpose of the AUX-IN input is to connect
external devices in order to play music (i.e.
iPod
®
or an mp3 player) using the factory-fit-
ted audio system or the navigation system.
MDI Input
The MDI input is located above the storage
compartment in the front centre console
››› Fig. 34 - ;
The MDI input is composed of the USB and
AUX-IN inputs.
The purpose of the MDI input is to connect
external devices (i.e. iPod
®
, mp3 players or
USB memories) in order to play music using
the audio system or the navigation system.
In order to connect Apple multimedia devices
(such as an iPod
®
/iPhone
®
, etc.) the corre-
sponding adaptor from the SEAT Original Ac-
cessories Catalogue is required.
Opening and closing
Remote control
General notes
The remote control key can
●
Lock and unlock the vehicle
●
Unlock or open the rear lid
The remote control transmitter and the bat-
teries are integrated in the key. The receiver
is inside the vehicle. The remote control key
has a maximum range of 30 metres. The
range is reduced as the batteries start to lose
power.
The key includes a foldaway part that can be
used to manually lock or unlock the vehicle
and to start the engine.
If a lost key is replaced or the receiver is re-
paired or changed, the remote control key
must be adapted by an authorised SEAT deal-
er. Only then can the remote control key be
used again.
Note
●
The remote control is automatically deacti-
vated when the ignition is switched on.
●
The remote control function may be tempo-
rarily limited by interference from other
»
51
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
transmitters near the vehicle that operate on
the same frequency (e.g. mobile phone, tele-
vision transmitter).
●
If the central locking system or the anti-
theft alarm only responds to the remote con-
trol at a distance of less than 3 metres, then
the battery must be replaced ››› page 53.
●
If the driver door is open, the vehicle can-
not be locked using the remote control.
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
Fig. 35 Remote control key
Unlocking the vehicle
–
Press button
1
.
Locking the vehicle
–
Press button
3
.
Deactivating the Safe lock
–
Press button
3
twice in 2 seconds. Further
information ››› page 54.
Unlocking the rear lid
–
Pr
e
ss button
2
. Further information
››› page 59
.
Unf
o
lding the key shaft
–
Press button
4
.
Folding the key shaft
–
Press button
4
and fold the key shaft back
to its original position.
The turn signals will flash twice when the ve-
hicle is unlocked. If the vehicle is unlocked
using button
1
and none of the doors or the
rear lid is opened in the following 30 sec-
onds, the vehicle will automatically relock
and the Safe lock or the anti-theft alarm will
be activated. This function prevents the vehi-
cle from being unlocked by mistake.
Locking indication
The turn signals will flash if the vehicle has
been correctly locked.
Should any of the doors or the rear lid remain
open when the vehicle is locked, the turn sig-
nals will only flash when they are closed.
WARNING
Do not leave people or animals in vehicles
locked from outside with the Safe lock activa-
ted: the doors and windows cannot then be
opened from the inside. Doors locked in this
manner could delay assistance in an emer-
gency. Risk of death!
Note
●
Only use the remote control when the
doors and the rear lid are locked and the ve-
hicle is within sight.
●
Do not press the lock button
on the re-
mote control before inserting the key in the
ignition, otherwise the vehicle could be
locked by mistake. Should this occur, press
the unlock button
on the remote control.
Remote control synchronisation
f the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked
using the remote control, the key code may
not match that of the control unit. This can
occur when the remote control buttons are
frequently pressed outside the range of the
system or if the remote control battery has
been replaced.
In this case, it must be synchronised as fol-
lows:
●
Press any key on the remote control key.
52
Opening and closing
●
Open the door using the key within the
next minute.
Keys
General notes
Fig. 36 Key with remote control/Key without
remote control.
Two keys are always supplied with the vehi-
cle. Depending on the model version, your
car may include keys without remote control
››› Fig. 36
or w
ith remote control ›
›› Fig. 36
.
WARNING
●
Never leave the key inside whenever you
leave the vehicle - even if only for a moment.
This is particularly important if children are
to remain in the vehicle. Children might start
the engine or some other electrical compo-
nent, e.g. electric windows. Risk of injury!
●
Wait until the vehicle has completely stop-
ped before taking the key out of the ignition.
Otherwise the steering wheel may lock sud-
denly. Risk of accident!
CAUTION
●
Each key contains electronic components
and must, therefore, be protected from damp-
ness and strong vibrations.
●
Keep the grooves in the key shaft clean.
Any dirt (fibre from clothing, dust, etc.) has a
negative impact on locks, ignition, etc.
Note
Should a key be lost, request a duplicate key
from an Authorised SEAT dealer.
Replacing the battery in the remote
control key
Fig. 37 Remote control key: removing the cov-
er/taking out the battery.
Each remote control key contains a battery
that is fitted below the cover
A
››› Fig. 37
. If
the b
att
ery is flat, the red control lamp
››› Fig. 36 will not light up when one of the
buttons is pressed. We recommend replacing
the battery at a SEAT dealer. You can replace
the battery yourself as follows.
»
53
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
–
Unfold the key shaft.
–
Remove the battery cover by pressing down
with your thumb or a flat screwdriver in the
location of the arrows
1
››› Fig. 37
.
–
R
emo
ve the flat battery from the key by
pressing downwards in the location of the
arrows
2
.
–
Insert the new battery. Check that the “+”
symbol on the battery is facing upwards.
The correct polarity is indicated on the bat-
tery cover.
–
Replace the battery cover and press down
until it clicks.
CAUTION
●
The correct polarity must always be ob-
served when replacing the battery.
●
The new battery must be of the same type
as the original.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of the used battery in line with na-
tional legislation.
Note
If it is not possible to unlock or lock the vehi-
cle with the remote control key once the bat-
tery has been replaced, it will need to be re-
synchronised ››› page 52.
Central locking system
General notes
All of the doors, the boot lid and the fuel cap
flap w
ill
1)
unlock at the same time when the
central locking system is used.
Warning lamp on the driver door
Once the doors are locked, the warning lamp
will flash quickly for 2 seconds and then at a
slower rate.
If the vehicle is locked with Safe lock engag-
ed ››› page 55, the warning lamp on the
driver door w
ill flash quickly for 2 seconds
before switching off for 30 seconds and then
flashing at a slower rate.
If the warning lamp flashes quickly for 2 sec-
onds and then remains switched on before
flashing at a slower rate after 30 seconds,
there is a fault in the interior monitor and
tow-away protection system ››› page 58. Go
to a technical service.
Individual settings
Unlocking single doors
This optional function unlocks the driver door
only. The other doors remain locked and are
only unlocked when the next command is giv-
en (unlock).
Automatic unlock and lock
The doors and the rear lid are locked auto-
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed
of about 15 km/h (9 mph).
The doors unlock automatically when the key
is removed from the ignition. Additionally,
the driver or front passenger can unlock the
doors by pressing the
›››
page 56 central
lock button or by pulling the front door han-
dle.
WARNING
Locking the doors prevents intruders from
getting into the car, e.g. while waiting at in-
tersections. However, it can also delay assis-
tance in the event of an accident. Risk of
death!
Note
●
Activation of the single door setting can be
requested at your SEAT dealer.
1)
Valid for vehicles with a keyless fuel tank cap.
54
Opening and closing
●
In the event of an accident in which the air-
bags deploy, the doors will be automatically
unlocked for easier access and assistance.
●
If the central locking system should fail to
work at any time, only the driver door can be
locked or unlocked using the key
››› page 55. All other doors and the boot
hat
ch can be operated manually.
–
Manual release ››› page 161.
–
Manual release of the rear lid
››› page 161.
Unlocking the vehicle with the key
Fig. 38 Key positions during vehicle locking
and unlocking.
–
Turn the key in the driver door in the for-
ward driving direction to its unlock position
A
››› Fig. 38
.
–
P
u
ll the handle and open the door.
●
All doors (driver door only on vehicles with
anti-theft alarm) are unlocked.
●
The rear lid is unlocked.
●
The fuel tank flap is unlocked
1)
.
●
The courtesy lights switch on.
●
The Safe lock is deactivated.
●
The driver door warning lamp stops flash-
ing (on vehicles not equipped with an anti-
theft system) ››› page 57.
Note
If the vehicle is equipped with an anti-theft
alarm system, you have 15 seconds from the
time the door is opened to insert the key in
the ignition and start the vehicle. If, during
these 15 seconds, the vehicle is not started,
the alarm is triggered.
Locking the vehicle with the key
–
Turn the key in the driver door lock cylinder
in the reverse direction to its lock position
B
›››
Fig. 38
.
●
The door
s, the boot
lid and the fuel tank
flap
1)
will be locked.
●
The courtesy lights switch off.
●
The Safe lock is immediately activated.
●
Warning lamp on the driver door starts to
flash.
Note
The vehicle doors cannot be locked if the
driver door is open.
Safe Lock
The central locking system is equipped with a
Safe lock
. If the vehicle is closed from out-
s
ide, the door loc
ks will automatically lock.
The warning lamp on the driver door will
flash quickly for about 2 seconds and then at
a slower rate. It is not possible to open any of
the doors from the inside or outside using
the handle. This limits the possibility of in-
truders getting into the vehicle.
The Safe lock can be deactivated by pressing
the lock button twice in less than 2 seconds.
If Safe lock is out of service, the control lamp
on the driver door will flash quickly for about
2 seconds before switching off for 30 sec-
onds and then flashing at a slower rate.
»
1)
Valid for vehicles with a keyless fuel tank cap.
55
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
The Safe lock is re-activated on unlocking
and locking the vehicle again.
If the vehicle is locked and the Safe lock is
deactivated, the vehicle can be opened from
inside by pulling on the door handle.
WARNING
Do not leave people or animals in locked ve-
hicles with Safe lock activated: the doors and
windows cannot then be opened from the in-
side. Doors locked in this manner could delay
assistance in an emergency. Risk of death!
Note
●
The anti-theft alarm switches on automati-
cally when the vehicle is locked, even if the
Safe lock is deactivated. The Vehicle interior
monitoring, however, is not activated.
●
Given that the Safe function will be activa-
ted on locking the vehicle, CHECK DEADLOCK
will be shown on the general instrument pan-
el display. On vehicles equipped with an in-
formative display, Caution SAFE! On-board doc-
umentation!
Central locking button
Fig. 39 Central lock button.
If the vehicle has not been locked from out-
side, it is possible to lock and unlock the
doors from inside by pressing the ››› Fig. 39
button, even without the key in the ignition.
Locking of all doors, the boot lid and the fuel
tank flap
1)
–
Press the button ››› Fig. 39
. The warning
l
amp
on the button will light up.
Unlocking of all doors, the boot lid and the
fuel tank cap
1)
–
Press the button ››› Fig. 39. The warning
lamp on the button will switch off.
If the vehicle has been locked using the cen-
tral lock button.
●
The rear boot lid cannot be unlocked from
the outside (security measure, e.g. when
stopped at an intersection).
●
The doors can be unlocked individually by
pulling the handle.
●
The vehicle doors cannot be locked if any
of the doors are open.
●
In the event of an accident in which the air-
bags activate, doors locked from the inside
will be automatically unlocked for easier ac-
cess and assistance.
WARNING
The central locking system remains operative
when the ignition is switched off. Never leave
children unattended in the vehicle, as doors
locked from the inside delay assistance in an
emergency. Risk of sustaining fatal injuries!
Note
The handles and the central lock buttons will
not work if the Safe lock ››› page 55 is activa-
ted.
1)
Valid for vehicles with a keyless fuel tank cap.
56
Opening and closing
Childproof locks
Fig. 40 Activating the childproof lock.
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors
from being opened from the inside. Doors
can only be opened from the outside.
The childproof lock is activated and deactiva-
ted using the ignition key.
Activating the childproof lock
–
Turn the slot in the direction of the arrow
››› Fig. 40
(in the other direction on the
right
-h
and door).
Deactivating the childproof lock
–
Turn the slot in the opposite direction of
the arrow (in the other direction on the
right-hand door).
Anti-theft alarm system*
General notes
The anti-theft alarm system increases vehicle
protection from intruders. The system will ini-
tiate acoustic and optical warning signals
when your vehicle is tried to be forced.
Activating the alarm system
The anti-theft alarm switches on automatical-
ly when the vehicle is locked using the re-
mote control key or inserting the key in the
driver door. The alarm is activated around 30
seconds after the vehicle is locked.
Deactivating the alarm system
The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated
when the remote control unlock button is
pressed. If the vehicle is not opened within
30 seconds after emitting the radio frequen-
cy signal, the system will be reactivated.
If the vehicle is unlocked using by inserting
the key in the driver door, the ignition must
be switched on within 15 seconds. This deac-
tivates the alarm system. If, during these 15
seconds,
the vehicle is not started,
the alarm
i
s triggered.
When does the system trigger an alarm?
The following areas of the vehicle are moni-
tored:
●
Bonnet
●
Rear lid
●
Doors
●
Ignition
●
Tilt angle ››› page 58, Vehicle interior
monitoring and tow-away protection system
●
The interior ››› page 58, Vehicle interior
monitoring and tow-away protection system
●
Drop in voltage in the car systems
●
The factory-fitted towing bracket
The alarm is triggered immediately if one of
the battery cables is disconnected while the
alarm system is active.
How to turn OFF the alarm
To deactivate the alarm, press the unlock but-
ton on the remote control key or switch on
the ignition.
Note
●
The alarm horn power supply has a 5-year
useful life. Contact an Official Service for
more detailed information.
●
To make sure that the anti-theft alarm is
fully operative when leaving the vehicle,
»
57
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
check that all the doors and windows are
closed.
●
Remote control and receiver unit coding
means that the remote control cannot be
used on other vehicles.
Vehicle interior monitoring and tow-
away protection system
Fig. 41 Button for vehicle interior monitoring
and the tow-away protection system.
The Vehicle interior monitoring system is acti-
vated if movements are detected in the interi-
or of the vehicle.
Deactivating Vehicle interior monitoring and
the tow-away protection system
–
Switch the ignition off.
–
Open the driver door.
–
Press the
››› Fig. 41 button on the centre
column. The red backlit symbol
on the
button turns orange.
–
Lock the vehicle within the next 30 sec-
onds.
The Vehicle interior monitoring system and
the tow-away protection system are reactiva-
ted when the vehicle is unlocked again.
Note
●
The vehicle interior monitoring system and
the tow-away protection system must be de-
activated if there is a danger of the alarm be-
ing triggered due to movements by children
or animals in the interior when being trans-
ported (e.g. by boat or by train) or towed.
●
The effectiveness of the Vehicle interior
monitoring system is reduced if the spectacle
case is left open. Always close the storage
compartment before locking the vehicle to
ensure that this monitoring system operates
correctly.
Rear lid
Automatic boot hatch lock
Where the vehicle has been locked by press-
ing the
button on the remote control with
the boot lid open, the boot lid will lock auto-
matically when closed.
The automatic rear lid locking time extension
function can be activated. When this function
is activated and once the boot lid has been
unlocked by pressing the
button on the
remote control key
2
››› page 52, the boot
lid can be re-opened for a certain length of
time.
Where required, the automatic boot lid lock-
ing time extension function can be activated
or deactivated at a SEAT Authorised Service,
which will provide all of the necessary infor-
mation.
Before the vehicle locks automatically, there
is a risk of intruders getting into the vehicle.
Therefore, we recommend you always lock
the vehicle by pressing the
button on the
remote control or by using the key without re-
mote control ››› page 55
58
Opening and closing
Boot hatch
Fig. 42 Rear lid: opening from the outside.
Fig. 43 Close-up of the inside trim of the rear
lid: hand grip
The rear lid opening system operates electri-
cally. It is activated by using the handle on
the boot lid.
Opening the rear lid
–
Pull on the release lever and lift the rear lid
››› Fig. 42
. The rear lid will automatically
open.
C
lo
sing the rear lid
–
Hold the rear lid by one of the two handles
on the interior lining and close it, pushing
slightly.
This system may or may not be operative, de-
pending on the situation of the vehicle.
If the rear lid is locked then it cannot be
opened, however if it is unlocked then the
opening system is operative and the rear lid
may be opened.
To lock/unlock, press the button
or the
button
1
on the remote control key.
A warning appears on the instrument panel
display if the boot lid is open or not properly
closed.* An audible warning is also given if
the boot lid is opened while the vehicle is
moving faster than 6 km/h (4 mph)*.
WARNING
●
Always close the rear lid properly. Risk of
accident or injury.
●
Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down
with your hand on the rear window. The glass
could smash. Risk of injury!
●
Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it.
If not, it may open unexpectedly while driv-
ing.
●
Never allow children to play in or around
the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected
to extremely high and low temperatures, de-
pending on the time of year, thus causing se-
rious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal
consequences. Close and lock both the rear
lid and all the other doors when you are not
using the vehicle.
●
Closing the rear lid without observing and
ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury
to you and to third parties. Make sure that no
one is in the path of the rear lid.
●
Never drive with the rear lid open or half-
closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the
interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
●
If you only open the rear lid, do not leave
the key inside. The vehicle will not be opened
if the key is left inside.
Note
●
Once the rear lid is closed, its lock is en-
gaged and the alarm system is activated. On-
ly valid if the vehicle has been locked before
the rear lid is closed.
●
The release catch located at the top of the
registration plate recess is deactivated on ac-
celerating or at speeds of over 5 km/h (3
mph). The catch is reactivated when the vehi-
cle comes to a standstill and a door is
opened.
59
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Electric window opening and
closing
Introduction
WARNING
●
When locking the vehicle from the outside,
make sure that nobody is inside the vehicle,
as the windows cannot be opened from the
inside in an emergency.
●
For safety reasons, use safety button
5
››› Fig. 44 that deactivates the window
swit
ches on the rear doors when children are
travelling in the rear seats.
CAUTION
●
Keep the windows clean to ensure the sys-
tem operates correctly.
●
Defrost ››› page 125, Windows and exterior
mirrors any frozen windows before use. Oth-
erw
ise you run the risk of damaging the elec-
tric window riser mechanism.
●
Always make sure all of the windows are
closed on leaving the locked vehicle.
Note
●
The vehicle heating and ventilation system
should be used to ventilate the interior while
driving. Leaving the windows open could al-
low dust and other dirt to enter the vehicle
and cause unpleasant noises at certain
speeds.
●
Do not leave the side windows open at high
speeds, as this will overly increase fuel con-
sumption.
Using electric window switches
Fig. 44 Detail of the driver door: controls for
the windows.
The electric window opening and closing sys-
tem only works when the ignition is switched
on.
Opening
–
Press gently on the respective button on
the door to open the window. The process
will stop when the button is released.
–
The driver door window can also be auto-
matically opened by pressing the button as
far as it will go (fully open). Press the but-
ton again to immediately stop it.
Closing
–
Press the respective button gently to close
the window. The process will stop when the
button is released.
Window control buttons
Button for window in front left door
Button for window in front right door
Button for window in rear left door
Button for window in rear right door
Safety switch for deactivating the electric
window buttons in the rear doors
Safety button
Press the safety button
5
››› Fig. 44
to deac-
tiv
at
e the controls on the rear doors. Pressing
the safety button
5
again will reactivate the
controls on the rear doors.
If the rear door controls are deactivated, the
warning lamp on the safety button
5
will
light up.
Note
The electric window opening mechanism is
equipped with a thermostat switch. This may
overheat if the window is opened and closed
repeatedly. This causes the window to lock
temporarily. Once the thermostat switch has
1
2
3
4
5
60
Lights and visibility
cooled down, the window can be operated
once again.
Roll-back function on electric
windows
The electric windows are equipped with a
roll-back system that reduces risk of injury
when closing windows.
If an obstacle is present, the closing mecha-
nism will stop and the window will roll back a
few centimetres.
If an obstacle prevents closing for the next
10 seconds, the closing mechanism will once
again stop and the window will roll back an-
other few centimetres.
If in the next 10 seconds you attempt to close
the window after it has rolled back the sec-
ond time, only the closing mechanism will be
stopped even if the obstacle is still present.
The roll-back function is still connected.
The roll-back function will only be disconnec-
ted if you once again attempt to close the
window in the following 10 seconds. In this
case, the window will close at full force.
If you wait for a further 10 seconds, the roll-
back function will be once again connected.
Lights and visibility
Lights
Introduction
The location of the controls of right-hand
drive cars differs slightly from the location
shown her
e ››› Fig. 45 ››› page 61. However,
the symbols indicating the respective posi-
tions of the controls remain the same.
WARNING
Never drive with only the side lights on! The
side lights are not bright enough to illumi-
nate the road ahead and to ensure that other
road users are able to see you. Always use
your dipped beam headlights if it is dark or if
visibility is poor.
CAUTION
●
Use the lights in line with local law.
●
However, drivers always remain responsi-
ble for correctly adjusting and using the
lights.
Note
●
An audible warning will be heard when the
light control is set to and you remove the
ignition key
and open the door. Once the
driver door is closed (ignition off), the audi-
ble warning will stop, whereas the side lights
will remain on to light up the stationary vehi-
cle in case this is necessary.
●
Depending on weather conditions (cold or
wet), the lights may mist up temporarily on
the inside. This is particularly the case in the
event of a difference in temperature between
the inside and in front of the light. By switch-
ing on the lights, the area through which the
beam of light is projected will quickly be
demisted, although the edges may remain
misted. The real lights and turn signals can
mist up. This has no influence on the useful
life of the lighting system.
Sidelight and headlight
Fig. 45 Instrument panel: light control.
Switching on side lights
–
Turn the light switch ››› Fig. 45
to position
.
»
61
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Switching on dipped beam
–
Turn the light switch ››› Fig. 45
to position
.
Sw
it
ching off lights (except daytime driving
lights)
–
Turn the light switch ››› Fig. 45 to position
0.
Range control of main lights
Fig. 46 Instrument panel: light range control.
–
Turn the control ››› Fig. 46
to set the lights
t
o the r
equired setting.
Positions
The control positions roughly correspond to
the following vehicle load conditions.
Two front occupants, luggage compart-
ment empty.
-
All seats occupied, luggage compartment
empty.
All seats occupied, luggage compartment
fully loaded.
Driver only, luggage compartment fully
loaded.
CAUTION
Always adjust the range of the lights so that:
●
Your vehicle does not dazzle others, partic-
ularly oncoming traffic
●
The range of the headlights is sufficient for
safe driving
Note
Make sure you set the range of the main
lights when the dipped beam headlights are
switched on.
Daytime driving light
Daytime running lights are signalling devices
for improving road safety. The lights are built
into the headlights and come on each time
the ignition is turned on if the light switch is
in position
0
or
›
››
Fig. 45. It is automati-
cally switched off when the side lights are
turned on.
1
2
3
Automatic control of the dipped beam in
combination with the daytime running lights
If the dipped beam control
and the
daytime
r
unning lights are activated at the same
time, the dipped beams and the instrument
panel lighting will automatically come on as
required (e.g. when entering a tunnel) and
the daytime running lights will switch off.
When the automatic dipped beam control
switches off the dipped beams (e.g. when
coming out of a tunnel), the daytime running
lights come back on.
WARNING
The rear lights do not come on with the day-
time driving light. A vehicle which does not
have the rear lights on may not be visible to
other drivers in the darkness, if it is raining
or in conditions of poor visibility.
Note
Please observe any relevant legal require-
ments which may apply in your country.
62
Lights and visibility
Turn signal and main beam lever
Fig. 47 Turn signal and main beam lever.
The turn signal and main beam lever also op-
erates the parking lights and the headlight
flasher.
Right and left-hand turn signal
–
Move the lever ››› Fig. 47
up
A
or down
B
.
–
In order for the turn signals to flash three
times (turn signal to change lanes), move
the lever briefly up or down just as far as
point of resistance and then release it.
–
Keep the lever held down at the point of re-
sistance for the turn signals to flash for as
long as you hold the lever, e.g. when
changing lanes.
Main beams
–
Switch on the dipped beam
›››
page 61.
–
Press the lever ››› Fig. 47
forward in the di-
r
ection indic
ated by arrow
C
.
–
Pull the lever back to its original position in
the direction indicated by arrow
D
to
switch the main beam off.
Headlight flasher
–
Pull the lever ››› Fig. 47 towards the steer-
ing wheel (point of resistance) in the direc-
tion indicated by arrow
D
.
Parking lights
Instructions for use ››› page 65.
CAUTION
Never use the main beam headlights or the
headlight flasher if they could dazzle other
drivers.
Note
●
The turn signals only work when the igni-
tion is switched on. The corresponding warn-
ing lamp or flashes in the general instru-
ment p
anel.
●
The turn signals switch off automatically
when the steering wheel is returned to the
straight-ahead position.
●
If a turn signal bulb is defective, the control
lamp flashes at double speed.
Automatic headlight control (AHC)
If the light switch is in this position
››› Fig. 45, the side lights, headlights and the
number pl
ate lights will turn on or off auto-
matically.
The light is adjusted according to the data re-
corded by the light sensor that is installed
between the windscreen and the inside rear
view mirror.
If the light switch is in position , the sym-
bol located next to the light switch will il-
luminate. If the light illuminates automatical-
ly, symbol located next to the light switch
will also illuminate.
Automatic headlights in case of rain
If the light switch is in position and is
connected to the automatic wipe in case of
rain for more than 10 seconds or wipe (posi-
tion
2
or
3
) for longer than 15 seconds,
›››
page 69
then the side lights and head-
lights
w
ill automatically switch on.
The light automatically switches off if more
than 4 minutes have elapsed and the auto-
matic wipe or wipe (position
2
or
3
) have
not been switched on.
»
63
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
CAUTION
Do not cover the windscreen light sensor with
stickers or similar objects; this could impair
operation.
Front fog lights*
Fig. 48 Instrument panel: light switch.
Switching on front fog lights
–
First turn the light switch
›››
Fig. 48
to posi-
tion , or
.
–
Pull on the light switch to position
1
.
The
›››
page 32
warning lamp lights up on
the g
ener
al instrument panel if the front fog
lights are switched on.
Front fog lights with cornering
function*
3 Not valid for vehicles fitted with Full-LED lights
Front
fog lights with cornering function pro-
vide better lighting of the area around the car
when driving through a corner or parking,
etc.
Front fog lights with cornering function
switch on depending on how far you turn the
steering wheel or whether or not the turn sig-
nals
1)
are switched on, if the following condi-
tions are met:
●
The vehicle is stationary, the ignition is
switched on or you are moving at a speed of
less than 40 km/h (25 mph);
●
The daytime driving light is switched off
●
The dipped beam is switched on
●
The fog lights are switched off
●
Reverse gear is not engaged
Rear fog light
Switching on the rear fog light
–
First turn the light switch ››› Fig. 48
››› page 64 to position
, or .
–
Pull on the light switch to position
2
.
If the vehicle is not equipped with front fog
lights ››› page 64, the rear fog light is switch-
ed on by
turning the switch to position or
and pulling it to position
2
. This type of
switch only has one position.
The ››› page 32
warning lamp lights up on
the g
ener
al instrument panel if the rear fog
lights are switched on.
If you are towing a trailer or caravan equip-
ped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with a
factory-fitted towing bracket or one installed
using parts from the original SEAT parts
catalogue, only the rear fog light on the trail-
er or caravan will light up.
1)
In the event of a conflict between both functions,
i.e. if you turn the steering wheel to the left while the
right-hand turn signal is on, the turn signals will take
priority.
64
Lights and visibility
“Coming Home”/“Leaving Home”*
function
This function makes it possible, under poor
visibility conditions, to automatically turn on
the lights for a brief period of time after the
vehicle has been parked or when approach-
ing the vehicle.
The function is automatically turned on if the
following conditions are met:
●
The light switch is in position
››› page 63
.
●
The
v
isibility around the vehicle is reduced.
●
The ignition is switched off.
To turn on this function, switch on the head-
light flasher prior to exiting the vehicle.
The light is adjusted according to the data re-
corded by the light sensor that is installed
between the windscreen and the inside rear
view mirror.
The function automatically turns on the side
lights and headlights, the lighting for the en-
try area on the exterior mirrors and the num-
ber plate light.
“Coming Home” function
The light is automatically switched on when
the driver door is opened (for 60 seconds af-
ter the ignition is switched off).
The lights is switched off when all the doors
and the boot lid are closed.
If a door or the boot lid remains open, the
light will switch off after 60 seconds.
“Leaving Home” function
The light is automatically switched on when
the vehicle is unlocked using the remote con-
trol.
The light is switched off after 10 seconds or
when the vehicle is locked.
Hazard warning light switch
Fig. 49 Instrument panel: switch for hazard
warning lights.
–
Press the button ››› Fig. 49
to switch the
h
az
ard warning lights on or off.
The warning lamps on the instrument panel
and the warning lamp on the switch will flash
at the same time as the turn signals when
the hazard warning lights are switched on.
The hazard warning lights also work when
the ignition is switched off.
The hazard warning lights come on automati-
cally in the event of an accident in which an
airbag is triggered.
Note
Switch on the hazard warning lights to warn
other road users, for example:
●
When reaching the tail end of a traffic jam
●
if the vehicle has a technical fault or you
are involved in an emergency situation.
Parking lights*
Parking lights
–
Switch the ignition off.
–
Move the turn signal lever
›››
Fig. 47
›››
page 63
up or down to turn on the right
or l
ef
t-hand parking lights respectively.
Parking light on both sides
–
Turn the light switch
›››
Fig. 45
›››
page 61 to position and engage the
steering lock.
»
65
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Note
●
The parking lights can only be activated
with the ignition disconnected.
●
The parking light will not come on automat-
ically after switching off the ignition if the
left- or right-hand turn signal is left on.
Adjusting the headlights
The light beam of the dipped beam lights is
asymmetric: the side of the road on which
you are driving is lit more intensely.
When a car that is manufactured in a country
that drives on the right travels to a country
that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor-
mally necessary to cover part of the headlight
bulbs with stickers or to change the adjust-
ment of the headlights to avoid dazzling oth-
er drivers.
In such cases, the regulations specify certain
light values that must be complied with for
designated points of the light distribution.
This is known as “Tourist light”.
The light distribution of the halogen and full-
LED headlights of the SEAT Toledo allows the
specific “tourist light” values to be met with-
out the need for stickers or changes in the
settings.
Note
“Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. If
you are planning a long stay in a country that
drives on the other side, you should take the
vehicle to an Authorised Technical Service to
change the headlights.
Interior lights
Interior lighting – version 1
Fig. 50 Interior lighting – version 1.
Switching on the interior light
–
Move the switch
A
›››
Fig. 50
toward the
s
ide of
the light. The symbol will be dis-
played.
Switching off the interior light
–
Move the switch
A
›››
Fig. 50
to the centre
po
s
ition O.
Operating the courtesy light
–
Move the switch
A
››› Fig. 50
to the centre
of
the light
. The symbol will be dis-
played.
Reading lights
–
The reading lights are switched on and off
by pressing switch
B
››› Fig. 50
.
Wher
e the c
ourtesy light is on (switch
A
››› Fig. 50
in position
), the light will come
on if:
●
the
vehicle is unlocked,
●
one of the doors is opened,
●
The key is removed from the ignition
When the courtesy light is on (switch
A
in
position ), the light will switch off if:
●
the vehicle is locked,
●
the ignition is switched on,
●
30 seconds after all of the doors have been
closed
If a door is left open or if switch
A
is in the
position, the interior lighting switches off
after about 10 minutes to prevent the battery
from running flat.
66
Lights and visibility
Interior lighting – version 2
Fig. 51 Interior lighting – version 2.
Switching on the interior light
–
Move the light switch to position
››› Fig. 51
.
Sw
it
ching off the interior light
–
Move the light switch to position 0.
Operating the courtesy light
–
Move the light switch to position .
The lights in version 2 are operated using the
same guidelines as ››› page 66, Interior light-
ing – version 1.
Rear interior light
Fig. 52 Rear interior light.
Press the button ››› Fig. 52
to switch the light-
in
g on or off
.
Glove compartment light
The light will come on automatically when
the glove compartment is opened. The light
will go out when the glove compartment is
closed.
Luggage compartment light
The light switches on automatically when the
boot is open and switches off automatically
10 minutes after the boot lid has been
opened.
Visibility
Heated rear window
Fig. 53 Heated rear window switch.
–
Switch the heated rear window on or off by
pressing the button
››› Fig. 53
, the warn-
in
g l
amp in the button will come on or go
off respectively.
The heated rear window only works when the
engine is running.
After approximately 7 minutes, the heating
device of the rear window switches off auto-
matically.
For the sake of the environment
The heated rear window should be switched
off as soon as the glass is demisted. By sav-
ing electrical power you can also save fuel
››› page 106.
»
67
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Note
In the event of a drop in voltage in the on-
board systems, the heated rear window
switches off automatically to ensure enough
power to control the engine ››› page 143, Au-
tomatic disconnection of electrical equip-
ment.
Sun visors
Fig. 54
Driver's sun visor.
Fig. 55 Front passenger's sun visor.
The sun visors for the driver and the front
passenger can be pulled out of their central
supports and turned towards the doors in the
direction of arrow
1
››› Fig. 54
and
2
››› Fig. 55
respectively.
The s
trip
A
is to store small objects such as
notepaper, etc.
The front passenger sun visor includes a van-
ity mirror
B
with a cover. The cover is
opened by sliding it in the direction indicated
by arrow
3
››› Fig. 55
.
WARNING
Do not turn sun visors with attached objects
such as ball-pens, etc. toward the head pro-
tection airbag triggering zone on the side
windows. The head protection airbags could
injure occupants if triggered.
Windscreen wipers and
windscreen washers
Introduction
The windscreen wipers and windscreen
washers only work when the ignition is
switched on.
The speed of the automatic wipe in case of
rain is automatically adjusted according to
the intensity of the rainfall.
The rear window is wiped once if the wind-
screen wipers are switched on and reverse
gear is engaged.
Fill the windscreen washer fluid ››› page 139.
WARNING
●
Make sure the blades ››› page 162 are in
perfect condition for good visibility and safe
driving.
●
In cold conditions, you should not use the
wash/wipe system unless you have warmed
the windscreen with the heating and ventila-
tion system. The windscreen washer fluid
could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and
obscure your view of the road.
CAUTION
●
During winter, always check that the wind-
screen wiper blades are not frozen to the
glass before each trip or before switching on
the ignition. If you switch on the windscreen
wipers when the wiper blades are frozen to
the glass, this could damage both the wiper
blades and the wiper motor.
●
If the ignition is switched off when the
windscreen wipers are on, they will start op-
erating in the same mode when the ignition
is switched back on. The wiper blades may be
frozen to the glass at low temperatures when
the ignition is switched off.
●
Carefully separate the frozen wipers from
the windscreen or rear window.
68
Lights and visibility
●
Remove snow and ice from the wipers be-
fore starting your journey.
●
Careless handling could lead to the wiper
arms damaging the windscreen.
●
For safety reasons, the wiper blades should
be changed once or twice a year. They can be
purchased at a SEAT Authorised Service.
●
The ignition cannot be switched on while
the windscreen wiper arms are in a raised po-
sition. Otherwise, the windscreen wipers
would return to their original position and
could damage the paintwork on the bonnet.
Note
Keep the wipers clean. The wipers can be
soiled with remains of wax solutions from car
washes ››› page 124.
●
On vehicles equipped with windscreen
washer jets, these are heated once the en-
gine is running.
Handling windscreen wipers and
washers
Fig. 56 Window wiper lever.
Short wipe
–
Give the windscreen a brief wipe by moving
the lever down to position
4
››› Fig. 56
.
W
ipe int
ervals/automatic wipe with rain
sensor*
–
Push the lever up to position
1
››› Fig. 56
.
–
W
ith sw
itch
A
, adjust the wipe interval or
rain sensor sensitivity.
Switch
A
has 4 positions.
The rain sensor* is part of the intermittent
wipe function.
The rain sensor* controls the frequency of
the windscreen wiper intervals, depending
on the amount of rain.
Slow wipe
–
Push the lever up to position
2
››› Fig. 56
.
C
ontinuou
s wipe
–
Push the lever up to position
3
››› Fig. 56
.
Aut
om
atic windscreen wash and wipe
–
Pull the lever towards the steering wheel,
position
5
››› Fig. 56
, and the windscreen
w
a
sher and wipers are switched on.
–
Release the lever. The washer will stop and
the windscreen wipers will keep running for
1-3 wipes (depending on the windscreen
washer operating time).
Rear window wiper*
–
Press the lever forward to position
6
››› Fig. 56
and the rear window wiper will
ru
n ev
ery 6 seconds.
Automatic rear window wash and wipe*
–
Press the lever fully forward to position
7
››› Fig. 56
and the rear window wiper and
w
a
sher switch on at the same time.
–
Release the lever. The rear window washer
will stop and the rear window wipers will
keep running for 1-3 wipes (depending on
the jet operating time). When released, the
lever remains in position
6
.
»
69
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Switching off the wipers
–
Move the lever to position
0
››› Fig. 56
.
WARNING
The rain sensor may not detect enough rain
to switch on the wipers.
●
If necessary, switch on the wipers manually
when water on the windscreen obstructs visi-
bility.
Note
Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front
of the rain sensor*. This may cause sensor
disruption or faults.
Headlight washer system*
The headlight washers operate briefly if the
dipped headlights or headlights are on and
the lever is moved to position
5
›››
Fig. 56
.
The he
a
dlight washer system also operates
every 10 windscreen wash cycles.
Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the
headlights at regular intervals, for instance
when filling the fuel tank. Please observe the
following indications
›››
page 126, Head-
lights.
To ensure the system works properly in win-
ter, keep the nozzle holders free of snow and
remove any ice with a de-icer spray.
CAUTION
Never pull on the nozzle holders. Risk of
damage to the system!
Rear vision mirrors
Interior rear vision mirror with manual
anti-dazzle adjustment
Basic settings
–
Push the lever at the bottom of the mirror
forward.
Rear vision mirror anti-dazzle setting
–
Pull the lever at the bottom of the mirror to-
wards you.
Exterior mirrors
Fig. 57 Door interior: adjuster knob.
Before beginning any journey, adjust the rear
view mirrors for a good rear visibility.
Heated rear vision mirrors*
–
Turn the knob to position
›
›› Fig. 57
.
Electrical adjustment of the left-hand
exterior mirror*
–
Turn the knob to position ››› Fig. 57. The
mirror movements are the same as those of
the knob.
Electrical adjustment of the right-hand
exterior mirror*
–
Turn the knob to position ››› Fig. 57. The
mirror movements are the same as those of
the knob.
WARNING
●
Convex (wide-angle) rear vision mirrors give
a larger field of vision. However, they make
objects appear smaller and further away than
they really are. For this reason, you should
not rely on these rear vision mirrors for judg-
ing the distance of vehicle behind.
●
If possible, use the interior rear vision mir-
ror to estimate distances to vehicles behind
you.
Note
●
Exterior mirrors are only heated when the
engine is running.
70
Seats and head restraints
●
Do not touch the exterior mirrors when the
heating system is running.
●
If the electrical adjustment should ever fail
to operate, the rear vision mirrors can be ad-
justed by hand by pressing the edge of the
mirror glass.
●
Visit the technical service in the event of a
fault in the electrical rear vision mirror ad-
justment system.
Seats and head restraints
Adjusting seats and head
restraints
Introduction
Set the driver seat in such a way that the
pedals can be fully depressed with your legs
slightly bent.
Set the driver seat backrest so that you can
reach the upper point of the steering wheel
with your arms slightly bent.
The correct seat position is very important
for:
●
reaching all of the controls safely and
quickly,
●
a relaxed posture that will not produce fati-
gue,
●
maximum protection from the seat belts
and airbag system
WARNING
●
Adjust the driver seat only when the vehi-
cle is stationary. Risk of accident!
●
Be careful when adjusting the front seats!
Careless and uncontrolled adjustment can
cause injuries.
●
The backrests must not be reclined too far
back while driving. This could limit the effect
of the seat belts and the airbag system. Risk
of injury!
●
Never transport more than the permitted
amount of people in your vehicle.
●
Every occupant in the vehicle must properly
fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to
his or her seat. Children must be protected
with an appropriate child restraint system
››› page 24, Transporting children safety.
●
The front seats, head restraints and seat
belts must always be adjusted to the size of
the vehicle occupant to provide you and your
passengers with the greatest possible protec-
tion.
●
Your feet should remain in the footwell
while the vehicle is moving; never rest them
on the dash panel, on the window or on the
seat! This also applies to passengers. An in-
correct sitting position exposes you to an in-
creased risk of injury in case of a sudden
braking or an accident. If the airbag is trig-
gered, you could sustain severe injuries due
to an incorrect sitting position!
●
It is important for the driver and front pas-
senger to keep a distance of at least 25 cm
from the steering wheel and dash panel. Fail-
ure to respect the minimum distance means
that the airbag will not protect you. Risk of
fatal injury if triggered!
●
Objects must not be placed in the footwell,
as they could move to the area of the pedals
in the event of a braking manoeuvre or
change of direction. This would prevent the
»
71
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
clutch, brake or accelerator from being press-
ed.
●
Do not place any items on the front passen-
ger seat other than those allowed (e.g. child
seat). Risk of accident!
Note
After a certain time, the backrest angle ad-
justment mechanism may gain a certain
amount of play.
Manually adjusting the front seats
Fig. 58 Seat adjustment controls/Adjustment
controls for a sports seat
Adjusting the seat forwards and backwards
–
Lift the lever
1
››› Fig. 58
(the central part)
and mo
v
e the seat forwards or backwards.
–
Then release the lever
1
and move the
seat further until the catch engages.
Adjusting seat height
–
To raise, pump the lever
2
››› Fig. 58
(sev-
er
al
times if required) upwards to the re-
quired seat position.
–
To lower, pump the lever
2
(several times
if required) downwards to the required seat
position.
Adjusting the backrest angle
–
Take your weight off the backrest and pull
the lever
3
››› Fig. 58
backwards, pressing
on the b
ac
krest to the required angle.
–
When the lever
3
is released, the backrest
will remain in the set position.
Head restraints
Fig. 59 Head restraints: adjusting/removing
head restraints.
Head restraints cannot be moved up or down
or removed on sports seats.
Adjusting height
–
Take hold of the sides of the head restraint
and pull upwards.
72
Seats and head restraints
–
To lower the head restraint, press button
A
››› Fig. 59
while pushing the head re-
s
tr
aint downward.
Fitting and removing head restraints on front
seats
–
Push the head restraint up as far as it will
go.
–
Press catch
A
››› Fig. 59
and remove the
he
a
d restraint.
–
To refit, insert the head restraint into the
holes in the backrest, pushing it down until
it engages.
Fitting and removing head restraints on rear
seats
–
Push the head restraint up as far as it will
go.
–
Press catch
1
››› Fig. 59
while pressing on
the c
at
ch in hole
2
with a max. 5 mm flat-
headed screwdriver and remove the head
restraint.
–
To refit, insert the head restraint into the
holes in the backrest, pushing it down until
it engages.
For maximum head restraint protection, ad-
just the head restraint so that its upper edge
is at the same level as the top of your head.
The head restraint must be adjusted in line
with the height of users. Correct adjustment
of the head restraint, together with the seat
belts, ensure effective passenger protection
››› page 6
.
WARNING
●
Badly adjusted head restraints increase the
risk of injuries in the event of an accident.
●
Never drive with the head restraints re-
moved. Risk of injuries!
●
If the seats are in use, never drive with the
rear head restraints in their out-of-use posi-
tion.
Seat functions
Heated front seats*
Fig. 60 Heated front seats.
The cushion and backrest of the front seats
can be heated electrically.
Press the
or
››› Fig. 60
button to switch
on and a
dju
st the heated front seats.
Press once to connect the heating at maxi-
mum force.
Press the button again to reduce the force of
the heating and switch it off. The force is indi-
cated by the number of warning lamps lit on
the button.
WARNING
Do not use the heated seat if your perception
of pain and/or temperature or that of your
passenger is limited, e.g. due to medication,
paralysis or chronic illness (e.g. diabetes). It
could cause burns on the back, buttocks and
legs that are difficult to heal. If you still want
to use the heated seat, take frequent breaks
on long journeys so that the body can recover
from the trip. Ask your doctor about your par-
ticular situation.
CAUTION
●
To avoid damaging the heating elements,
do not kneel on the seat or apply sharp pres-
sure at a single point to the seat cushion or
backrest.
●
Do not use the heated seats if nobody is
sitting on them or if there are items attached
to or lying on them, such as a child seat or a
bag, etc. This could lead to a fault in the seat
heating elements.
●
Do not clean the seats with anything damp
››› page 127.
»
73
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Note
●
Only connect the heated seats when the
engine is running. This provides considerable
savings on the battery capacity.
●
In the event of a drop in voltage in the on-
board systems, the heated seats switch off
automatically to ensure enough power to con-
trol the engine ››› page 143, Automatic dis-
connection of electrical equipment.
Armrest on front seats with inner
storage*
Fig. 61 Armrest/Opening and closing the
storage compartment.
Adjusting armrest height
–
Lift the armrest as far as it will go and then
fold it downward.
–
Raise the armrest until it engages in one of
the 5 positions.
Opening storage compartment
–
Press the button located on the front of the
armrest ››› Fig. 61
-
.
–
Lif
t the storage compartment lid ››› Fig. 61 -
.
Armrests on rear seats
Fig. 62 Rear seats: armrest.
The armrest can be folded away for greater
comfort using the handle ››› Fig. 62
.
74
Seats and head restraints
Folding the rear backrest
Fig. 63 Unlocking the backrest.
Folding
–
Before folding the rear seats, adjust the po-
sition of the front seats so that the rear
seats are not damaged. When the front
seats are adjusted to the rear position,
their head restraints should be removed
before folding the backrests on the rear
seats. Store the removed head restraints in
such a way that they cannot be soiled or
damaged.
–
Insert the seat belt latch plate into hole
A
››› Fig. 63
located on the corresponding
s
ide of
the vehicle – safety position.
–
Press the lock button
B
to unlock the
backrest and fold it forward.
Returning to the initial position
–
Where the head restraint has been re-
moved, insert it into the backrest when par-
tially raised.
–
Push the backrest backwards to its original
position until the lock button engages –
check that it is locked by pulling on the
backrest ››› .
–
Make sure the red protruding part
C
is not
visible.
WARNING
●
Once the backrests have been lifted, the
seat belts and their buckles must be in their
initial position – ready for use.
●
The backrests must be safely locked to en-
sure any items in the boot cannot move
around the interior of the vehicle in the event
of a sudden braking manoeuvre. Risk of inju-
ries!
●
Make sure the rear backrests are correctly
locked. Only then will the three-point auto-
matic seat belt on the rear central seat work
correctly.
CAUTION
Take care when handling the rear backrests
so as not to damage the seat belts. The seat
belt must never be left behind the lifted back-
rest.
75
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Transport and practical
equipment
Practical equipment
Passenger side glove compartment
Fig. 64 Instrument panel: passenger side
glove compartment.
Fig. 65 Storage: cooling control.
Opening and closing passenger side glove
compartment
–
Pull the catch on the lid in the direction in-
dicated by the arrow ››› Fig. 64
and open
the lid.
–
C
lo
se the lid and push it until it engages.
Glove compartment cooling*
Open or close the air outlet by turning the
thumbwheel ››› Fig. 65.
If the air outlet is open and the air condition-
ing is on, the cooled air will be released into
the glove compartment.
If the air outlet is open and the air condition-
ing is off, outdoor air (not conditioned) will
be released into the glove compartment.
The air outlet should be closed if the air con-
ditioning is being used in heating mode or
where glove compartment cooling is not in
use.
WARNING
●
For safety reasons, all storage compart-
ments must be closed while the vehicle is
moving.
●
Never place any objects on the instrument
panel. These objects could be flown around
the interior while the vehicle is moving (on
accelerating or turning) and distract you. Risk
of accident!
●
Make sure objects remain in the centre con-
sole or other compartments while the vehicle
is moving. Otherwise, this could prevent you
from braking, changing gear or accelerating.
Risk of accident!
Note
The glove compartment can hold a bottle no
larger than 1 litre.
Compartment for reflective vest
Fig. 66 Driver seat: storage compartment
There is a compartment below the driver seat
››› Fig. 66
to store the reflective vests.
WARNING
The compartment is solely designed to store
the reflective vest and no other objects. Ob-
jects falling out of the storage compartment
could limit or prevent use of the pedals.
76
Transport and practical equipment
CAUTION
The compartment is solely designed to store
the reflective vest and no other objects, since
there is a risk of damaging the storage com-
partment.
Front seat storage compartments
There is a storage pocket on the rear part of
the backrest of the front seats.
These pockets are designed to hold maps,
magazines, etc.
WARNING
Do not place heavy objects in the pockets.
Risk of injury!
CAUTION
Do not place overly large objects in the pock-
ets (e.g. bottles) or objects with sharp edges.
Risk of damage to the pockets and the up-
holstery.
Drink holder in centre console
Fig. 67 Centre console: drink holder
Front drink holder in the centre console
Rear drink holder in the centre console
WARNING
●
Do not put hot drinks in the drink holders.
They could spill while the vehicle is moving.
Risk of scalding!
A
B
●
Do not use cups or glasses made of fragile
materials (e.g. glass or china). These could
cause injury in the event of an accident.
CAUTION
Avoid putting open drinks containers in the
drink holder while the vehicle is moving.
They could spill (e.g. on braking) and cause
damage to the electrical equipment or the
seat covers.
Drink holder in the rear armrest
Fig. 68 Rear seats armrest: drink holder
Two drinks can be placed in the drink holder.
Use the detachable parts
A
and
B
››› Fig. 68
to change the size of the holes.
–
R
emo
ve part
A
or
B
in the direction indi-
cated by the arrow and replace in the re-
quired position in the drink holder.
77
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Cigarette lighter*
Fig. 69 Centre console: lighter
The cigarette lighter is located at the front of
the centre console ››› Fig. 69
.
U
s
ing the cigarette lighter
–
Press the cigarette lighter knob ››› Fig. 69.
–
Wait for the lighter to spring out.
–
Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the
cigarette on the glowing coil immediately.
–
Put the cigarette lighter back in its socket.
WARNING
●
Take care when using the cigarette lighter!
Carelessness or negligence when using the
cigarette lighter can cause burns and serious
injuries.
●
The cigarette lighter also works when the
ignition is off and when the ignition key is re-
moved. Therefore, never leave children unsu-
pervised in the vehicle.
Note
●
The 12 V power socket of the cigarette
lighter can also be used as a power source for
electrical appliances ››› page 79, 12 Volt
power socket
.
●
Addition
al information ››› page 122, Acces-
sories and modifications to the vehicle.
Ashtrays*
Fig. 70 Centre console: front ashtray/rear
ashtray.
Removing the ashtray
–
Pull the ashtray ››› Fig. 70
upwards to re-
mo
v
e.
Inserting the ashtray
–
Push the ashtray down.
78
Transport and practical equipment
WARNING
Never put flammable materials in the ashtray.
Risk of fire!
CAUTION
Never hold onto the ashtray by the lid when
removing it. Risk of breaking the lid.
12 Volt power socket
Fig. 71 Centre console: 12 V power socket.
The 12 V power socket is located at the front
of the centre console
›››
Fig. 71
.
U
s
ing the power socket
–
Open the cover or remove the cigarette
lighter concealing the socket.
–
Insert the plug of the electrical appliance
into the socket.
Additional information ››› page 122, Acces-
sories and modifications to the vehicle.
WARNING
●
Improper use of the sockets or electrical
appliances can cause a fire and lead to burns
and other serious injuries.
●
Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle. The 12 V power socket is also func-
tional when the ignition is switched off and
the key is removed.
●
Should the connected appliance overheat,
immediately switch it off and disconnect it
from the socket.
CAUTION
●
The 12 V power socket can only be used to
power appliances with a power rating of up to
120 watts.
●
Never exceed the maximum permitted pow-
er, as this could cause damage to the vehicle
electrical installation.
●
With the engine switched off, however, the
vehicle battery will drain. Risk of discharging
the battery!
●
Only use suitable plugs so as not to dam-
age the power socket.
●
Only use appliances that have been tested
for electromagnetic compatibility in compli-
ance with current regulations.
●
Before switching the ignition on or off, un-
plug the appliances from the power socket to
protect them from any damage caused by
fluctuations in voltage.
●
Follow the instructions for use of connected
appliances!
Multimedia compartment
Fig. 72 Front centre console: multimedia
compartment.
The multimedia compartment is in the stor-
age compartment of the front centre console
››› Fig. 72
.
The c
omp
artment can be used to hold mobile
phones, mp3 players or similar devices.
WARNING
Never use the multimedia compartment as an
ashtray or to store flammable materials. Risk
of fire!
79
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Storage compartment for
(sun)glasses*
Fig. 73 Close-up of roof panel: storage com-
partment for eyeglasses.
–
Press the compartment lid and it will drop
down ››› Fig. 73
.
WARNING
This compartment must only remain open
when removing or replacing glasses.
CAUTION
●
Do not place heat-sensitive objects in the
compartment as they could be damaged.
●
The side compartment supports a maxi-
mum load of 0.25 kg.
Coat hooks*
The coat hooks are located on the B-pillars
and on the handles on the interior lining
above each rear door.
WARNING
●
Make sure that any items of clothing hang-
ing from the coat hooks do not obstruct your
view to the rear.
●
Only use the coat hooks for light items of
clothing and make sure that there are no
heavy or sharp objects in the pockets.
●
Do not use clothes hangers to hang up the
clothing, as this could interfere with the func-
tion of the head-protection airbags.
CAUTION
The side hooks support a maximum load of 2
kg.
Net pockets on back of front backrests
Fig. 74 Front seats backrests: net pockets.
There are net pockets on the inside part of
the front seats backrests ››› Fig. 74
.
The
se poc
kets are designed to hold light-
weight objects such as a mobile phone or an
mp3 player.
WARNING
●
Do not exceed the maximum load that the
net pockets can support. Heavy objects can-
not be safely secured. Risk of injuries!
CAUTION
●
The net pockets support a maximum load of
150 g.
●
Do not place overly large objects in the
pockets (e.g. bottles) or objects with sharp
edges. Risk of damage to the pockets.
80
Transport and practical equipment
Storage compartments in centre
console
Fig. 75 Centre console: storage compartment
Open storage compartment in centre console
››› Fig. 75
.
St
or
age compartment in front door
Fig. 76 Storage compartment in door trim.
There is a bottle carrier in part
B
››› Fig. 76
of the storage compartment in the front door.
WARNING
Only use part
A
››› Fig. 76 of the compart-
ment in the fr
ont door to store objects that do
not protrude from it so as not obstruct the de-
ployment area of the side airbags.
Storage compartment in luggage
compartment*
Fig. 77 Luggage compartment: storage com-
partment
The lid from the side storage compartment
can be removed to increase the size of the
boot.
–
Hold onto the top of the lid and pull it out
in the direction indicated by the arrow
›››
Fig. 77
.
CAUTION
●
The compartments are designed to hold
small objects with a total weight of 1.5 kg.
●
Make sure you do not damage the storage
compartment or the boot trim when using the
compartment.
Storing objects
Loading the luggage compartment
All luggage and other loose objects must be
safely secured in the luggage compartment.
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth
could impair the driving safety or driving
characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the
centre of gravity.
–
Distribute the load evenly in the luggage
compartment.
–
Place heavy objects as far forward as possi-
ble in the luggage compartment.
–
Place the heavy objects first.
–
Secure heavy objects to the fastening rings
›››
page 82
.
WARNING
●
Loose luggage and other objects in the lug-
gage compartment could cause serious inju-
ries.
»
81
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
●
Always stow objects in the luggage com-
partment and secure them on the fastening
rings.
●
Use suitable straps to secure heavy ob-
jects.
●
During sudden manoeuvres or accidents,
loose objects can be thrown forward, injuring
vehicle occupants or passers-by. This in-
creased risk of injury will be further increased
if a loose object is struck by an inflating air-
bag. If this happens, objects may shoot out-
ward like a missile. Risk of fatal injury.
●
Please note that the centre of gravity may
shift when transporting heavy objects; this
may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-
cident. Therefore, it is essential to adjust
your speed and driving style accordingly, to
avoid accidents.
●
Never exceed the allowed axle weights or
allowed maximum weight. If said weights are
exceeded, the driving characteristics of the
vehicle may change, leading to accidents, in-
juries and damage to the vehicle.
●
Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe-
cially when the rear lid is open. Children
could climb into the luggage compartment,
closing the door behind them; they will be
trapped and run the risk of death.
●
Never allow children to play in or around
the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors and
rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Before
you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are
no adults or children in the vehicle.
Note
●
Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce
fogging of the windows. Used air escapes
through ventilation slits in the side trim of
the luggage compartment. Ensure that the
ventilation slots are never covered.
●
Straps for securing the load to the fasten-
ing rings are commercially available.
Fastening rings*
There can be four fastening rings in the lug-
gage compartment for fastening luggage and
other objects.
–
Always use suitable and undamaged straps
to secure luggage and other objects to the
fastening rings
›››
in Loading the lug-
gage compartment on page 81.
–
Pull up the fastening rings to attach the
straps.
During a collision or an accident, even small
and light objects can build up so much ener-
gy that they can cause very severe injuries.
The amount of kinetic “energy” depends on
the speed of the vehicle and the weight of
the object. The most significant factor, how-
ever, is the speed of the vehicle.
Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying
unsecured in the vehicle. During a frontal col-
lision at a speed of 50 km/h (31 mph), this
object generates a force corresponding to 20
times its weight. That means that the effec-
tive weight of the object increases to approxi-
mately 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of
the injuries which might be sustained if this
“object” strikes an occupant as it flies
through the interior of the vehicle. This in-
creased risk of injury will be further increased
if a loose object is struck by an inflating air-
bag.
WARNING
●
If pieces of baggage or other objects are se-
cured to the fastening rings with inappropri-
ate or damaged retaining cords, injuries
could result in the event of braking manoeu-
vres or accidents.
●
Never secure a child seat on the fastening
rings.
Luggage compartment
Introduction
Please observe the following points to ensure
the vehicle handles well at all times:
–
Distribute the load as evenly as possible.
–
Place heavy objects as far forward in the
luggage compartment as possible.
–
Secure luggage using the fastening rings or
retaining net
›››
page 83.
82
Transport and practical equipment
During an accident, even small and light ob-
jects can have so much kinetic energy that
they can cause very severe injuries. The
amount of kinetic energy depends on the
speed of the vehicle and the weight of the
object. However, the speed of the vehicle is
the most important factor.
Example: An unsecured object weighing 4.5
kg produces energy corresponding to 20
times its weight in a frontal collision at 50
km/h (31 mph). This means that its weight
reaches around 90 kg. You can imagine the
severity of the injuries that might be sus-
tained if this “projectile” strikes an occupant
as it flies through the vehicle interior.
WARNING
●
Store objects in the luggage compartment
and secure to the fastening points.
●
In an accident or sudden manoeuvre, loose
objects in the interior can be flung forward
and possibly injure vehicle occupants or oth-
ers. This risk is even greater if the flying ob-
jects hit a triggering airbag. In this case, any
rebounding objects could injure vehicle occu-
pants. Risk of fatal injuries!
●
Take into account that transporting heavy
objects changes the centre of gravity that
could also cause changes in vehicle handling.
Risk of accident! Therefore, always adjust
your speed and driving style to suit these cir-
cumstances.
●
Securing the load to the rings using unsuit-
able or damaged straps could lead to injuries
in the event of an accident or sudden braking
manoeuvre. Secure suitable straps safely to
the rings to ensure this does not happen.
●
Position the load so it cannot move forward
during a sudden braking manoeuvre. Risk of
injuries!
●
If transporting sharp or dangerous objects
in the space provided when the rear seats are
folded, ensure the safety of the occupant of
the remaining rear seat ››› page 8.
●
If the r
ear seat located alongside a folded
seat is occupied, ensure safety, for example,
by placing the load so that it stops the seat
from folding backward in the event of being
hit from behind.
●
Never drive with the rear lid open or half-
closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the
interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
●
Never exceed the allowed axle loads or al-
lowed maximum weight. Risk of accident!
●
Never transport passengers in the luggage
compartment!
CAUTION
Make sure sharp objects stored in the boot
cannot not damage the rear window heating
filaments.
Note
Tyre pressure must be adapted to suit the
load ››› page 144, Life cycle of tyres.
Category N1 vehicles
Category N1 vehicles with no protection grille
must use a retaining set compliant with
Standard EN 12195 (1 – 4) to secure the
load.
Retaining elements*
Fig. 78 Luggage compartment: retaining ele-
ments.
The following retaining elements are fitted in
the boot
›››
Fig. 78
:
Rin
g
s to secure the load and the retain-
ing nets.
Rings used solely for the retaining nets.
»
A
B
83
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
CAUTION
The rings support a maximum load of 3.5 kN
(350 kg).
Note
The front ring
B
is below the folding back-
rest of the rear seats ››› Fig. 78.
Hook*
Fig. 79 Luggage compartment: hook.
There are hooks on both sides of the boot to
secure light items of luggage such as bags,
etc.
›››
Fig. 79
.
CAUTION
The side hooks support a maximum load of
7.5 kg.
Retaining nets*
Fig. 80 Retaining nets.
Fig. 81 Retaining nets.
Example of securing retaining nets ››› Fig. 80
and ››› Fig. 81
.
Sidew
a
ys bag
Ground net
Lengthways bag
A
B
C
WARNING
Do not exceed the maximum load that the
nets can support. Heavy objects cannot be
safely secured. Risk of injury!
CAUTION
●
The retaining nets support a maximum load
of 1.5 kg.
●
Do not place any item with sharp edges in
the net. Risk of damaging the net!
84
Transport and practical equipment
Rear shelf
Fig. 82 Remove the shelf.
Fig. 83 Remove the shelf.
The shelf can be removed if a large load is to
be transported.
Removing the shelf
–
Remove the straps from the shelf
1
››› Fig. 82
.
–
R
emo
ve the shelf from its housing
2
by
knocking it gently from underneath be-
tween the supports.
Fitting the shelf
–
Place the shelf on the side supports on the
trim.
–
Adjust the shelf supports
3
››› Fig. 83
to fit
the s
up
ports
2
in the trim.
–
Fit into place by knocking the top of the
shelf gently between the supports.
–
Attach the straps
1
to the tray.
WARNING
Do not place objects on the rear shelf that
could endanger the vehicle occupants in case
of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an acci-
dent.
CAUTION
●
The rear shelf supports a maximum load of
1 kg.
●
If handled incorrectly, the tray could bend
on closing the rear lid and become damaged
or damage the trim. Follow the instructions
below:
–
The shelf supports
3
››› Fig. 83 must be
secur
ely in place in the trim supports
2
.
–
The size of the load must not exceed the
height of the shelf.
–
When open, the shelf must not be bent
against the shelf seal.
–
There must be no objects in the space be-
tween the open shelf and the backrest of
the rear seat.
Note
The shelf will lift when the rear lid is opened.
Roof rack*
Introduction
WARNING
●
The load on the roof carrier must be proper-
ly secured. Risk of accident!
●
Always secure the load using retaining
straps that are in good condition.
●
Distribute the load evenly.
●
When transporting heavy or large objects
on the roof, any change in normal vehicle be-
haviour due to a change in the centre of gravi-
ty or increased wind resistance must be taken
into account. Risk of accident! For this rea-
son, speed and driving style must be adjus-
ted for the situation.
●
Avoid sudden manoeuvres and braking.
●
Adjust your driving style to suit visibility,
the weather and road and traffic conditions.
»
85
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
●
Never exceed the allowed axle loads or al-
lowed maximum weight. Risk of accident!
CAUTION
●
Only use SEAT-authorised roof carriers.
●
Where roof carriers from other systems are
used or where they are not fitted properly,
any damage caused to the vehicle will not be
covered by the warranty. Therefore, carefully
follow the Instruction Manual for installation
of the roof carrier.
●
Remember that the rear lid must not hit the
roof load.
●
The total height of the vehicle increases ac-
cording to the roof load. Compare the height
of the vehicle with the heights of bridges or
other underpasses, for example, the height
of the garage door.
●
Do not forget to remove the roof carrier be-
fore entering an automatic carwash.
●
Take into account that the load must not
damage the aerial located on the roof.
For the sake of the environment
If aerodynamic resistance increases, fuel con-
sumption will also increase.
Attachment points
Fig. 84 Basic roof carrier attachment points.
Location of the basic roof carrier attachment
points ››› Fig. 84
:
R
e
ar attachment points
Front attachment points
Install and remove following the instructions
given.
A
B
CAUTION
Follow the instructions given in the manual.
Roof load
The maximum permissible roof load (includ-
ing the support system) of 75 kg and the to-
tal
authorised weight of the vehicle must not
be exceeded.
It will not be possible to carry the full maxi-
mum load if the roof carrier you are using is
rated for a load which is less than this figure.
In this case, you can only load the roof carrier
to the maximum load permitted in your in-
stallation manual.
86
Heating and air conditioning
Heating and air conditioning
Heating and air conditioning
General notes
The power of the heating depends on the
temperature of the coolant. Therefore, maxi-
mum power is only obtained when the en-
gine has reached operating temperature.
The temperature and humidity of the air in-
side the vehicle decrease when the cooling
system is turned on. This therefore increases
the comfort of all vehicle occupants when
outside temperatures and humidity are high.
It also helps prevent the windows from mist-
ing over during cold periods of the year.
The air recirculation system can be switched
on temporarily to increase the cooling effect.
Keep the air intake slots in front of the wind-
screen clear of ice, snow or leaves to ensure
unimpaired heating and cooling.
When the air conditioning is on, condensa-
tion
can drip from the evaporator in the air
c
oo
ling system and form a pool underneath
the vehicle. This is normal and does not indi-
cate a leak!
WARNING
●
All windows must be clear of ice, snow and
condensation for driving safety. Therefore,
make sure you familiarise yourself with the
correct use of heating and ventilation, win-
dow demisting and defrosting and cooling.
●
Never use the air recirculation system for
too long, as it prevents fresh air from enter-
ing the vehicle and used air can cause tired-
ness, reduce your attention span and cause
the windows to mist over. This increases the
risk of an accident. Switch off the air recircu-
lation system as soon as the windows begin
to mist over.
Note
●
Used air escapes through ventilation slots
in the rear of the luggage compartment.
●
Smoking is not recommended while the air
recirculation system is in use, as the smoke
drawn from the interior of the vehicle settles
in the evaporator of the air conditioning sys-
tem. This causes a persistent, unpleasant
smell while the system is running that is
time-consuming and expensive (evaporator
replacement) to eliminate.
●
To ensure proper functioning, never cover
the air outlets.
Economic use of the air conditioning
system
When the air conditioning is switched on, the
compressor consumes engine power and has
influence on fuel consumption.
If the vehicle interior has overheated due to
excessive solar radiation, it is best to open
the windows or doors to allow the hot air to
escape.
While in motion, the air conditioning should
not be switched on if the windows are open.
If the interior temperature can be reached
without switching on the air conditioning, the
fresh air mode should be used.
For the sake of the environment
Saving fuel reduces emissions.
Faults
If the air conditioning does not work at out-
side temperatures above +5 °C (+41 °F) then
the system is faulty. This may be due to one
of the following reasons:
●
One of the fuses has blown. Check the fuse
and replace if necessary
›››
page 163.
●
The air conditioning compressor has
switched off temporarily because of in-
creased engine coolant temperature
›››
page 31
.
If
you cannot repair the fault yourself or
where cooling power continues to drop,
switch off the system. Contact a specialised
service.
87
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Air vents
Fig. 85 Air vents
Opening air vents 3 and 4
–
Turn the vertical circular control upwards.
Closing air vents 3 and 4
–
Turn the vertical circular control down-
wards.
Changing the direction of air delivery from
air vents 3 and 4
–
The air circulation height can be varied by
changing the position of the sliding adjust-
er upwards or downwards ››› Fig. 85
.
–
The air c
ir
culation direction can be varied
by changing the position of the sliding ad-
juster to the right or to the left.
The flow of air from the vents is controlled us-
ing control
C
››› Fig. 86
. Vents 3
›
›› Fig. 85
and 4 can be opened and closed individually.
Depending on the position of the adjusters
and on the weather, open vents can provide
air which is either heated, unheated or
cooled.
Heating
Operation
Fig. 86 Heating: controls.
88
Heating and air conditioning
Temperature selection
–
Turn rotary control
A
››› Fig. 86
clockwise
t
o inc
rease the temperature.
–
Turn rotary control
A
anti-clockwise to re-
duce the temperature.
Blower selection
–
Turn rotary control
B
››› Fig. 86
to position
1 t
o 4 t
o switch the blower on.
–
Turn rotary control
B
to position 0 to
switch the blower off.
–
Press button
1
››› in Air recirculation on
page 90
to close the fresh air vent.
Air di
s
tribution selection
–
Turn rotary control
C
››› Fig. 86
to select
the air
v
ents ››› page 88, Air vents you wish
to activate.
All controls, except control
B
››› Fig. 86
, can
be set
t
o any intermediate position.
Leave the blower activated at all times to pre-
vent the windows from misting over.
Note
If the system is set so that all of the air is
used to defrost the windows, no air is sup-
plied to the footwell area. This could limit
heating comfort.
Heating selection
Recommended settings for the different modes:
Settings
Control position
Button
1
Air vents 4
A B C
Windscreen and side window de-
frost
Clockwise as far as it will go 3
Do not switch on
Open and direct towards the
side window
Windscreen and side window de-
frost
Required temperature 2 or 3
/
Do not switch on
Open and direct towards the
side window
Heat as quickly as possible Clockwise as far as it will go 3
Switch on briefly Opening
Mild heating Required temperature 2 or 3
/
Do not switch on Opening
Fresh air mode - blower
Anti-clockwise as far as it
will go
Required position
Do not switch on Opening
»
89
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Note
●
Controls
A
››› Fig. 86 ››› p
age 88,
B
,
C
and button
1
.
●
Air vents 4 ››› page 88.
●
We r
ecommend you leave the air vents 3
››› page 88 in the open position.
Air recirculation
Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells,
e.g. when passing through a tunnel or in
queuing traffic, from entering the interior.
Switching on air recirculation mode
–
Press button
1
›››
Fig. 86
›
›
›
page 88
and the lamp in the button will illuminate.
Switching off air recirculation mode
–
Press button
1
›››
Fig. 86
›
›
›
page 88
again and the lamp in the button will
switch off.
If air vent
C
›››
Fig. 86
›
›
›
page 88 is in posi-
tion
, air recirculation mode switches off
automatically. Press the
button to switch
air recirculation mode back on in this posi-
tion.
WARNING
Read and observe the safety warnings ››› in
General notes on page 87.
Air conditioning (manual)*
General notes
The air cooling system only works if
A/C
but-
ton
2
›››
Fig. 87
›
›
›
page 90 is pressed and
under following conditions:
●
The engine is running,
●
The outside temperature is above +2 °C
(+36 °F),
●
The blower control is in position 1–4.
When the cooling system is on and under cer-
tain conditions, air can be blown from the
vents at a temperature of approximately
+5 °C (+41 °F). In the event of prolonged, ir-
regular distribution of the air flow from the
outlets and significant differences in temper-
ature, e.g. on leaving the vehicle, sensitive
people may catch cold.
Note
A visit to the specialised service once a year
is recommended to clean the air conditioning
system.
Operation
Fig. 87 Air conditioning: controls.
Temperature selection
–
Turn rotary control
A
››› Fig. 87
clockwise
t
o inc
rease the temperature.
–
Turn rotary control
A
anti-clockwise to re-
duce the temperature.
Blower selection
–
Turn rotary control
B
››› Fig. 87
to position
1 t
o 4 t
o switch the blower on.
–
Turn rotary control
B
to position 0 to
switch the blower off.
–
Press button
1
››› page 92, Air recir-
culation
to close the fresh air vent.
90
Heating and air conditioning
Air distribution selection
–
Turn rotary control
C
››› Fig. 87
to select
the air
v
ents ››› page 88 you wish to
activate.
Switching cooling on and off
–
Press the button
A/C
2
››› Fig. 87
and the
l
amp in the b
utton will illuminate.
–
Press the
A/C
2
button again and the
light in the button will switch off.
Note
●
If the air distribution is directed towards
the windows, all, of the heating power is
used to defrost the windscreen. No warm air
is directed to the footwell area. This could
limit heating comfort.
●
The
AC
button lamp will illuminate after
the system has been switched on, even if not
all of the conditions for cooling system oper-
ations are met. Cooling is indicated as availa-
ble once all of the conditions are met
››› page 90, General notes.
91
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Air conditioning selection
Basic air conditioning control settings recom-
mended for the corresponding operating
modes:
Settings
Control position Button
Air vents 4
A B C 1 2
Windscreen and side window de-
frost
a)
Required tempera-
ture
3 or 4
Do not switch on
Switched on automati-
cally
b)
Open and direct towards the
side window
Heat as quickly as possible
Clockwise as far as
it will go
3
Switch on briefly Off Opening
Mild heating
Required tempera-
ture
2 or 3
/
Do not switch on Off Opening
Heat as quickly as possible
Anti-clockwise as far
as it will go
Briefly 4, then 2
or 3
Switch on briefly
c)
Ignition Opening
Optimum cooling
Required tempera-
ture
1 or 2
Do not switch on Ignition
Open and direct towards the
roof
Fresh air mode - blower
Anti-clockwise as far
as it will go
Required position
Do not switch on Off Opening
a)
This type of setting is not recommended in countries with high air humidity. The windows could cool too quickly and cause them to mist over on the outside.
b)
The lamp in button
2
lights up, even if not all of the conditions for cooling system operations are met. Cooling is indicated as available once all of the conditions are met ››› page 90, General notes.
c)
In certain conditions, air recirculation mode can switch on automatically ››› page 92, a lamp illuminates in the
button.
Note
●
Controls
A
››› Fig. 87 ››› p
age 90,
B
,
C
and buttons
1
and
2
.
●
Air vents 4 ››› page 88.
●
We recommend you leave the air vents 3
››› page 88 in the open position.
Air recirculation
Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells,
e.g. when passing through a tunnel or in
queuing traffic, from entering the interior.
92
Heating and air conditioning
Switching on air recirculation mode
–
Press button
1
››› Fig. 87
›
›› p
age 90
and the lamp in the button will illuminate.
Switching off air recirculation mode
–
Press button
1
››› Fig. 87
›
›› p
age 90
again and the lamp in the button will
switch off.
If air distribution control
C
››› Fig. 87
››› page 90
is in position , air r
ec
irculation
mode switches off automatically Press the
button to switch air recirculation mode
back on in this position.
WARNING
Read and observe the safety warnings ››› in
General notes on page 87.
Climatronic* (automatic air
conditioning)
General notes
Climatronic automatically maintains a com-
fortable temperature. To do so, it automati-
cally regulates the supplied air temperature
and the blower and air distribution levels.
The system also allows for the effect of sun-
light, so there is no need for manual adjust-
ment.
Automatic operations ›
›
› page 94
guarantee maximum comfort any time of
year.
Climatronic description
Cooling only works if the following conditions
are met:
●
The engine is running
●
the outside temperature is above +2 °C
(+36 °F);
●
A/C
18
››› Fig. 88
›
›› p
age 94 switched
on.
In order to ensure engines subject to heavy
loads are cooled, the air conditioning com-
pressor is switched off in the event of high
coolant temperatures.
Recommended setting for all seasons of the
year
●
Set the required temperature. We recom-
mend +22 °C (72 °F).
●
Press the
AUTO
button
12
››› Fig. 88
››› page 94
.
●
Adju
s
t vents 3 ››› page 88 and 4 so that the
air flow is directed slightly upwards.
Change between degrees Centigrade and
degrees Fahrenheit
Keep the
AUTO
and
A/C
››› Fig. 88
››› page 94
buttons pressed down at the
s
ame time.
The data is displayed on the
screen in the units required.
Note
A visit to the specialised service once a year
is recommended to clean the Climatronic sys-
tem.
93
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Controls
Fig. 88 Climatronic: controls.
Buttons/controls
Interior temperature setting
Display
Selected interior temperature
Degrees Centigrade or Fahrenheit
Automatic air conditioning mode
Defrost or demist windscreen
Air flow direction
Air recirculation
Cooling on/off
Selected blower speed
Buttons/controls
Set blower speed
Interior temperature sensor
Automatic mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Defrost or demist windscreen
Air distribution to windows
Air distribution to upper body
Air distribution to footwells
Air recirculation
Cooling on/off
Note
The interior temperature sensor
11
››› Fig. 88
››› page 94 is at the bottom. Do not cover it
with s
tickers or the like, as this could have a
negative effect on Climatronic operations.
13
14
15
16
17
18
Automatic mode
Automatic mode is used to maintain a con-
stant temperature and demist the windows
inside the vehicle.
Switching on automatic mode
–
Set the interior temperature between
+18 °C (+64 °F) and +29 °C (+84 °F).
–
Adjust vents 3 ››› p
age 88 and 4 so that the
air flow is directed slightly upwards.
–
Press the
AUTO
button
12
››› Fig. 88
and
A
UT
O displayed on the screen.
Automatic mode is switched off by pressing
the air distribution buttons or increasing or
decreasing the blower speed. However, the
temperature remains regulated.
94
Heating and air conditioning
Temperature selection
–
When you switch on the ignition, control
1
››› Fig. 88 ››› p
age 94 can be used to set the
required interior temperature.
It is possible to select interior temperatures
from +18 °C (+64 °F) to +29 °C (+84 °F). In
this range the temperature is regulated auto-
matically. If a temperature below +18 °C
(+64 °F) is selected, “LO” is displayed on the
screen. If a temperature above +29 °C
(+84 °F) is selected, “HI” is displayed on the
screen. At both extremes, Climatronic works
at maximum cooling or heating power, re-
spectively. The temperature is not regulated.
In the event of prolonged, irregular distribu-
tion of the air flow from the outlets (particu-
larly the footwells) and significant differen-
ces in temperature, e.g. on leaving the vehi-
cle, sensitive people may catch cold.
Air recirculation
Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells,
e.g. when passing through a tunnel or in
queuing traffic, from entering the interior.
Switching on air recirculation mode
–
Press button
17
›››
Fig. 88
›
›
›
page 94
and the
symbol is displayed on the
screen.
Switching off air recirculation mode
–
Press button
17
››› Fig. 88
›
›› p
age 94
and the
symbol disappears from the
screen.
WARNING
Read and observe the safety warnings ››› in
General notes on page 87.
Note
If air recirculation mode remains on for 15 mi-
nutes, the
symbol will start to flash on
the screen to indicate prolonged air recircula-
tion. If air recirculation is not switched off,
the symbol will continue to flash for about 5
minutes.
Blower selection
Climatronic automatically regulates the blow-
er speed according to the interior tempera-
ture. It is possible, however, to set the blower
speed to suit requirements.
–
Turn rotary control
10
›››
Fig. 88
›
›
›
page 94
counter-clockwise (to lower the speed) or
clockwise (to increase the speed).
Climatronic will switch off when the blower
switches off.
WARNING
●
Used air can cause tiredness, reduce atten-
tion spans and cause the windows to mist
over. This increases the risk of an accident.
●
Do not switch off Climatronic for longer
than necessary.
●
Switch Climatronic back on as soon as the
windows begin to mist over.
Windscreen defrosting
Switching on windscreen defrosting
–
Press button
13
›››
Fig. 88
›
›
›
page 94.
Switching off windscreen defrosting
–
Press button
13
›››
Fig. 88
›
›
›
page 94
several times or press the
AUTO
button.
The temperature is regulated automatically.
The air output is increased from vents 1
›››
page 88
and
2
.
95
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Driving
Starting and stopping the
engine
Introduction
WARNING
●
Never adjust the steering wheel while the
vehicle is moving!
●
For safety reasons, the steering wheel ad-
justment lever must always be pushed se-
curely against the steering column to prevent
the steering wheel from accidentally chang-
ing position while driving. Risk of accident!
●
If the steering wheel is adjusted closer to
your face, the protective effect of the driver
airbag will be decreased in the event of an ac-
cident. Check that the steering wheel is
pointing towards the upper part of your body.
●
When driving, always hold the steering
wheel with both hands on the outside part at
the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. Never
hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock po-
sition, or in any other manner (e.g. in the cen-
tre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if
the airbag is triggered, you may sustain inju-
ries to the arms, hands and head.
●
When moving with the engine switched off,
the ignition key must always remain in posi-
tion
2
››› Fig. 89 ››› p
age 97 (ignition on).
The control lamps will light up in this posi-
tion. Otherwise, the steering lock could en-
gage suddenly. Risk of accident!
●
Do not remove the key from the ignition un-
til the vehicle has come to a standstill and is
secure (e.g. the handbrake is engaged). Oth-
erwise, the steering lock could suddenly en-
gage. Risk of accident!
●
Always take the ignition key with you when
you leave the vehicle. This is particularly im-
portant if you leave children in the vehicle.
Children could, for example, start the engine
with the subsequent risk of accident.
●
Never leave the engine running in unventi-
lated or closed rooms. The exhaust gases
contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and
colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal acci-
dents! Carbon monoxide can cause people to
lose consciousness and can cause death.
●
Never leave the vehicle unattended if the
engine is running.
●
Never switch the engine off until the vehi-
cle has come to a complete stop. Risk of acci-
dent!
CAUTION
●
Turning the steering wheel fully in either
direction when the vehicle is stationary and
the engine is in gear puts the power steering
under great stress. This could lead to noise.
Never leave the steering wheel turned fully in
either direction for more than 15 seconds.
Risk of damage to the power steering system!
●
The starter motor may only be used (key
position
3
››› Fig. 89 ››› p
age 97 in the igni-
tion) if the engine is off. Using the starter mo-
tor when the engine is running could damage
it.
●
Immediately release the ignition key when
the engine starts, otherwise damage could be
caused to the starter motor.
●
When the engine is cold, you should avoid
high engine speeds, driving at full throttle
and over-loading the engine before it reaches
operating temperature. Risk of engine dam-
age!
●
Do not tow-start the engine. Risk of engine
damage! In vehicles with a catalytic convert-
er, fuel that has not been burned could reach
the catalytic converter and catch fire in it.
This would lead to a fault in the catalytic con-
verter. You may use the battery from another
vehicle to help you start your engine
››› page 157, Jump-starting.
●
After prolonged and demanding operation
of the engine, when the journey has ended,
do not stop the engine immediately. Let the
engine run at idle for about one more minute.
This will stop the engine from overheating.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm up the engine when the vehicle
is stationary. If possible, move off immediate-
ly after starting the engine. This will help the
engine reach operating temperature more
quickly, reducing the quantity of emissions.
96
Driving
Note
●
The engine can only be started with the
original SEAT key.
●
Loud running noises may be heard briefly
after cold-starting the engine. This is normal
and is no cause for concern.
●
After the engine has been stopped and the
ignition switched off, the radiator fan may
continue running for around 10 minutes.
●
If the engine still does not start after a sec-
ond attempt, the fuel pump fuse might have
blown. Check it and replace if necessary
››› page 163 or contact your Specialised
Serv
ice.
●
You should always engage the steering lock
when you exit the vehicle. This will hinder
any attempts at theft.
Power steering
The power steering allows you to turn the
steering wheel more easily.
If the power steering fails or the engine is off
(towing), it is still possible to turn the vehi-
cle's steering wheel fully. However, you need
more strength to steer the vehicle.
Start-up lock security system
(immobiliser)
There is an electronic chip in the key. The
electronic immobiliser is deactivated when
the key is inserted into the ignition. The elec-
tronic immobiliser is automatically activated
when the key is removed from the ignition.
The engine will not start if an unauthorised
key is used.
The informative display indicates:
Immobiliser active!
Ignition lock
Fig. 89 Ignition key positions.
Petrol engines
1
– Ignition switched off, engine stopped,
steering can be locked
2
– Ignition switched on
3
– Starting
Diesel engines
1
– Fuel supply stopped, ignition switched
off, engine stopped, steering can be locked
2
– Engine pre-heating, ignition switched
on
3
– Starting
To engage the
Steering lock without the key
in the ignition, t
urn the s
teering wheel slight-
ly until you hear it engage.
If the steering lock is engaged and it is diffi-
cult or impossible to turn the key to position
2
, release the lock by turning the steering
wheel slightly in both directions.
Starting the engine
Vehicles with a diesel engine are equipped
with a glow plug system. When you switch on
the ignition, the glow plug warning lamp
will light up. The engine can be started
straight away when the lamp switches off.
Do not connect electrical appliances during
preheating so as not the drain the vehicle
battery unnecessarily.
»
97
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Starting the engine
●
Move the gearbox lever into neutral or
move the selector lever to position
P
or
N and
pull firmly on the handbrake.
●
Press the clutch pedal all the way down
2
››› Fig. 89
›
›› p
age 97 and start the engine
3
,
without pressing the accelerator. Keep the
clutch pedal pressed down until the engine
starts.
●
Release the ignition key as soon as the en-
gine starts. The key returns to position
2
.
●
If the engine does not start after 10 sec-
onds, turn the key back to position
1
. Re-
peat the action after 30 seconds.
●
Release the handbrake before moving off.
Switching off the engine
Stop the engine by turning the ignition key to
position
1
›››
Fig. 89
›
›
›
page 97.
Brakes and brake servo
systems
Introduction
WARNING
●
The brake servo only works when the en-
gine is running. Braking when the engine is
switched off requires applying more strength
to the brake pedal. Risk of accident!
●
Press down on the clutch pedal when stop-
ping and braking with a manual gearbox, pet-
rol engine vehicle at low speed. Otherwise,
the brake servo might not work properly. Risk
of accident!
●
In the event of damage to the standard
front spoiler or where a different front spoil-
er, wheel trims, etc. are subsequently fitted,
make sure the air vent to the brakes on the
front wheels is not blocked. Otherwise, brak-
ing operations may be impaired. Risk of acci-
dent!
●
Always fully release the handbrake. If it is
only partially released, this will cause over-
heating of the rear brakes, which can impair
the function of the brake system. Risk of acci-
dent!
●
Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle. They could release the handbrake or
move the gear lever. The vehicle could start
moving. Risk of accident!
●
Insufficient fuel can cause the engine to run
irregularly or to switch off. Brake assist sys-
tems could be impaired. Risk of accident!
●
Always adjust your driving style to suit visi-
bility, the weather and road and traffic condi-
tions. The best vehicle safety offered by
brake assist systems must never encourage
you to run greater risks. Risk of accident!
CAUTION
●
Observe the information concerning new
brake pads ››› page 104
.
●
Where br
aking is not necessary, do not
wear down the brake pads by pressing down
gently on the brake pedal. This causes the
brakes to overheat, increasing their wear and
increasing braking distances.
●
To ensure the brake assist systems work
properly, all wheels must be fitted with tyres
approved by the manufacturer.
Note
●
If you brake suddenly and the brake system
control unit regards the situation as hazard-
ous for the drivers behind you, the brake
lights will begin to flash automatically. After
reducing speed to approximately 10 km/h (6
mph) or stopping the vehicle, the brake lights
will stop flashing and the hazard warning
lights will switch on. The hazard warning
lights are automatically switched off when
you accelerate or restart the vehicle.
98
Driving
●
On long, steep gradients, reduce your
speed and change to a lower gear (manual
gearbox) or move the selector lever to a lower
gear position (automatic gearbox). This uses
the force of the engine and the brakes do not
suffer as much. If you still have to brake, do
so intermittently, pressing down repeatedly
on the brake pedal.
●
Vehicle modifications (e.g. to the engine,
brakes, frame or a combination of wheels and
tyres) could impair the brake assist systems
››› page 122, Accessories and modifications
to the vehicle.
●
In the event of a fault in the ABS system,
the ESC, TCS and EDL are switched off auto-
matically. A fault in the ABS is indicated by
the ››› page 36 warning lamp.
Brakes
Wear
The rate of wear of the brake pads depends
on the driving style and on the way in which
the vehicle is used. The brake pads will wear
more quickly if you use your vehicle frequent-
ly in urban traffic and short trips or drive in a
sporty style. Under these demanding condi-
tions
, visit your specialised service, even be-
f
or
e the scheduled service date, so that the
thickness of the brake pads can be meas-
ured.
Wet roads or road salt
If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are driv-
ing on roads which have been gritted with
salt, braking power may set in later than nor-
mal. Dry the brakes as soon as possible by
braking repeatedly.
Corrosion
Long periods of inactivity and little use can
lead to rust on the brake discs and dirt on the
brake pads. Where the brake system is sub-
jected to light stress or in the case of corro-
sion, clean the brake discs by braking fully
several times at a high speed.
Brake system fault
If you notice that the braking distance sud-
denly increases and the brake pedal can be
pressed down more fully, there may be a fault
in the brake system. Visit a specialised serv-
ice immediately and adjust your driving style
to the extent of the damage and to limit the
effect of the brakes.
Low brake fluid level
Insufficient brake fluid could cause faults in
the brake system. The brake fluid level is con-
trolled electronically ››› page 33, Brake sys-
tem .
Brake servo
The brake servo supplements the pressure
you exert on the brake pedal. The brake servo
only works when the engine is running.
Handbrake
Fig. 90 Centre console: handbrake.
Applying the handbrake
–
Pull the handbrake lever up all the way.
Releasing the handbrake
–
Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and
press the unlock button at the same time
››› Fig. 90
.
–
K
eep the b
utton pressed down and push
the lever all the way down.
The warning lamp lights up when the hand-
brake is applied with the ignition on .
99
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Manual gearbox
Changing gears
Fig. 91 Gear shift diagram of a 5- or 6-speed
manual gearbox
When changing gear, always depress the
clutch pedal fully and keep it pressed down
to avoid excessive clutch wear.
In order to drive at an optimum RPM, follow
the gear change indications ››› page 32.
Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle is
stopped. On engaging reverse gear while the
engine is running, first wait a moment with
the clutch pedal pressed down fully to limit
gear shift noise.
The reverse lights switch on when the reverse
gear is selected and the ignition is on.
WARNING
Never engage reverse gear when moving for-
ward. Risk of accident!
Note
Do not rest your hand on the gear lever while
driving. The pressure of your hand could lead
to premature wear of the gear system.
Automatic gearbox
Basic information
The gearbox changes up and down automati-
cally. The gearbox can be set to Tiptronic
mode. The gears can be changed manually in
this mode
›››
page 102
.
The en
gine c
an only be started in positions P
or N. If, on engaging the steering lock,
switching the ignition on/off or starting the
engine, the selector lever is not in these posi-
tions, the informative display will show
Move
the selector lever to position P/N!
, or
P/N
is
shown on the general dash panel display.
At temperatures below -10 °C (14 °F), the en-
gine can only be started in position P.
Move the selector lever to position P when
parking the vehicle on a flat surface. On a
slope, the handbrake should be firmly ap-
plied before moving the selector lever to the
park position. This reduces the load on the
lock mechanism while making it easier to
move the selector lever from position P.
If, while the vehicle is moving, the selector
lever is accidentally moved to position N, re-
lease the accelerator and wait for the engine
to idle before moving it back into position.
WARNING
●
Never press the accelerator when selecting
the automatic gearbox operating mode when
the vehicle is stationary. Risk of accident!
●
Never move the selector lever to positions
R or P when driving. Risk of accident!
●
If the vehicle is to be stopped with a gear
selected and the engine idling (e.g. waiting
or moving slowly at traffic lights), press down
on the brake pedal because the transmission
is not entirely interrupted when the engine is
idling and the vehicle will tend to start mov-
ing.
●
Apply the handbrake firmly and put the se-
lector lever in position P before opening the
bonnet and working on the vehicle with the
engine running. Risk of accident! Strictly fol-
low the safety instructions ››› page 132, En-
gine compartment.
●
When st
opping on a slope (hill), try not to
stop the vehicle from moving by pressing the
“accelerator” with a gear selected. This could
overheat the clutch. If the clutch risks being
burnt due to this force, it would switch off
100
Driving
and the vehicle could move backwards. Risk
of accident!
●
If you have to stop on a hill, press down on
the brake pedal to stop the vehicle from mov-
ing.
●
The drive wheels could lose traction on a
slippery road surface when the kick-down
function is activated. Risk of sliding!
CAUTION
●
In DSG automatic gearboxes, the double
clutch is protected from overloads. If the hill
hold control is used, the clutches are subjec-
ted to greater force if the vehicle is at a
standstill on a slope or suddenly accelerating
on a slope.
●
Should the clutches overheat, the sym-
bol is shown on the informative display with
a warning message Gear overheated. Stop! In-
struction Manual! An audible warning is also
heard. Stop the vehicle in this case, stop the
engine and wait until the symbol has
switched off. Danger of damage to the gear-
box! You can continue driving once the sym-
bol is switched off.
Starting and driving
Starting
–
Press and hold the brake pedal.
–
Press and hold the interlock button on the
selector lever knob and move the selector
lever to position ››› page 101 before releas-
ing the interlock button.
–
Release the brake and press the accelera-
tor.
Stopping
–
The selector lever does not have to be
moved to position
N
if the vehicle is stop-
ped f
or a short period, e.g. at intersections.
Applying the brake is enough. However, the
engine must remain idling.
Parking
–
Press the brake pedal.
–
Apply the handbrake.
–
Press the interlock button, move the selec-
tor lever to position P and release the but-
ton.
Kick-down feature
The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-
celeration to be reached.
In any gear programme, press down fully on
the accelerator for the automatic gearbox to
activate the kick-down feature. This function
takes priority over the gear programmes with-
out taking into account the position of the se-
lector lever (D, S or Tiptronic) and is used to
reach maximum acceleration, using full en-
gine power. Depending on the road speed
and engine speed, the automatic gearbox
shifts down and the vehicle accelerates. It
only shifts up after the maximum engine
speed has been reached.
Selector lever positions
Fig. 92 Selector lever/Informative display: se-
lector lever positions.
The current position of the selector lever is
shown on the general instrument panel dis-
play
1
››› Fig. 92
.
»
101
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
P
– Parking position
In this position, the driven wheels are me-
chanically locked.
The parking position can only be selected
when the vehicle is stationary.
If you want to move the selector lever from
this position, press the interlock button on
the selector lever knob while pressing down
on the brake pedal.
If the battery is drained, the selector lever
cannot be moved from position P
.
R
– Reverse
Reverse gear must be engaged only when the
vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling.
To move the selector lever to position R from
positions P
or
N
, press the interlock button
on the selector lever knob and press down on
the brake pedal.
The reverse lights come on when the selector
lever is in position R and the ignition is on.
N
– Neutral (idling)
Neutral (idling) is engaged in this position.
To move the selector lever from position N (if
the lever has remained in this position for
more than 2 seconds) to position D or R at
speeds of less than 5 km/h (3 mph) and
when the vehicle is stationary, press down on
the brake pedal.
D
– Drive (forwards)
In this position, the gearbox automatically
changes to a lower or higher gear, depending
on engine requirements, the driving speed
and the gear shift programme.
To move the selector lever to position D from
position
N
at speeds of less than 5 km/h (3
mph) and when the
vehicle is stationary,
press down on the brake pedal.
In some situations (e.g. on mountain roads or
when towing a trailer or caravan), it can be
advantageous to switch temporarily to the
manual shift programme ››› page 102 so that
the gear ratios can be selected manually to
suit driving conditions.
S
– Sports driving position
Shifting up later than usual makes full use of
the engine power. This shifts down earlier in
relation to position
D
.
T
o move the selector lever to position S from
position D, press the interlock button on the
selector lever knob.
Tiptronic gearbox
Fig. 93 Selector lever: Tiptronic.
The Tiptronic gearbox allows the driver to
change gears manually using the selector
lever.
Activating the manual gearbox
–
From position
D
, push the selector lever to
the right
. The selected position of the se-
lector lever is shown on the general instru-
ment panel display together with the gear
engaged
1
››› Fig. 92
.
Shif
tin
g up
–
Push the selector lever gently forwards
+
››› Fig. 93
.
Shif
tin
g down
–
Push the selector lever gently backwards
-
››› Fig. 93
.
102
Driving
The manual gearbox can be activated when
the vehicle is either moving or stationary.
When accelerating, the gearbox automatical-
ly shifts up shortly before the maximum en-
gine speed is reached.
On shifting up, the gear is only engaged
when there is no risk of engine damage.
When the accelerator pedal is pressed down
to the kick-down zone, the gearbox will shift
down in line with the road speed and engine
speed.
Note
The kick-down function is also available in
manual shift mode.
Selector lever lock
Automatic selector lever lock
The selector lever is locked in the positions P
and
N
when the ignition is on. Press down on
the br
ake to unlock it. Remember, if the se-
lector lever is in positions P and N then the
warning lamp will light up on the general in-
strument panel
›››
page 38.
When the selector lever merely moves
through position N (e.g. when moved from R
to D), the lever lock is not applied. This
makes it possible, for example, to rock a
stuck vehicle backwards and forwards. The
lock is only applied if the brake is not press-
ed and the selector lever is moved to position
N for more than 2 seconds.
The selector lever only locks when the is vehi-
cle stationary or driving at a speed lower
than 5 km/h (3 mph). At a higher speed, it
automatically disconnects in the N position.
Interlock button
The interlock button on the selector lever
knob prevents the driver from inadvertently
engaging a gear. Press the button to unlock
the selector lever.
Safety interlock for ignition key
1)
After switching off the ignition, you can only
remove the ignition key if the selector lever is
in position P. When the ignition key is re-
moved, the selector lever is locked in posi-
tion P.
Driving programmes
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical-
ly-controlled automatic gearbox. Shifting up
or down depends on the programme selec-
ted.
For a
calm driving style, the gearbox uses the
mo
s
t economic programme. The gearbox
shifts up as quickly as possible and shifts
down as late as possible, thus increasing
driving economy.
With a sporty driving style, characterised by
sudden acceleration, heavy acceleration,
speeds that often increase and decrease and
maximum speed, the gearbox adapts to this
driving style when the accelerator is pressed
down fully (kick-down) by shifting down as
quickly as possible and can even shift down
by several gears at once.
Selecting the best driving programmes is an
endless job. Regardless of this, the driver can
also make the gearbox switch to a more dy-
namic gear shift programme by pressing the
accelerator quickly. This makes the automatic
gearbox shift down into a lower gear than the
one that would normally apply to the current
speed, allowing for more rapid acceleration
(e.g. to overtake another vehicle) without
having to press the accelerator until the kick-
down position. On shifting up in a corre-
sponding driving style, the gearbox returns to
the original programme.
When driving along mountain roads, the
gearbox adapts to the gradients. This avoids
having to frequently change gears when driv-
ing uphill. In Tiptronic mode, it is possible to
»
1)
Valid only for certain countries.
103
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
shift down manually when driving downhill to
use the braking effect of the engine.
Back-up programme
A back-up programme exists in case of faults.
In the event of a fault in the gearbox electron-
ics, it will continue to work in one of the cor-
responding back-up programmes. All seg-
ments of the screen are lit up or switched off.
The fault can be seen as follows:
●
The gearbox only engages certain gears
●
Reverse gear
R
cannot be engaged
●
The m
anual gearbox switches off in the
back-up programme
Note
If the gearbox switches to the back-up pro-
gramme, visit an Authorised Service as soon
as possible to solve the problem.
Run-in and economical driving
The first 1,500 km
Over the first 1,500 kilometres the engine
must be run in.
Up to 1000 kilometres
–
Do not drive at more than 3/4 of the maxi-
mum speed corresponding to the engaged
gear, i.e. up to 3/4 of the maximum permit-
ted engine speed.
–
Do not drive at full speed.
–
Avoid high engine speeds.
–
Do not tow a trailer.
From 1000 to 1500 kilometres (600 to 900
miles)
–
Slowly
increase the engine speed until
r
e
aching the maximum permitted speed of
the engaged gear, i.e. the maximum per-
mitted engine speed.
During its first few hours of running, the in-
ternal friction in the engine is greater than
later on, when all the moving parts have bed-
ded in. How the vehicle is driven over approx-
imately the first 1,500 kilometres (900
miles), determines the success of the proc-
ess of running in the engine.
Even after running in, the vehicle should not
be unnecessarily driven at high engine
speeds. The maximum permitted engine
speed is marked at the start of the red zone
on the rev counter dial. The gear must be
changed up when the red area is reached in
vehicles with a manual gearbox. Extremely
high engine speeds when accelerating are
automatically limited, however the engine is
not protected against high engine speeds
produced by incorrectly changing to a lower
gear, which could cause the engine to run at
revs above the maximum permitted amount,
and consequently result in damage to the en-
gine.
Additionally, vehicles with a manual gearbox
must also bear the following in mind: do not
drive with the engine speed too low. Change
down to a lower gear when the engine no
longer runs smoothly. Observe the recom-
mendations for changing gear ››› page 32,
Recommended gear display.
New tyres
New tyres must be submitted to “running in”,
given that initially their grip is not yet at the
maximum level. During the first 500 km (120
miles) drive very carefully.
New brake pads
New brake pads do not yet provide maximum
friction capacity. First they must be “run in”.
During the first 200 km (120 miles) drive very
carefully.
CAUTION
All the information for speed and engine
speed refers to an engine that operates at op-
erating temperature. Do not run the engine at
high engine speeds, neither when stopped or
while driving.
104
Driving
For the sake of the environment
Do not drive at unnecessarily high engine
speeds; changing to a higher gear sooner
contributes to saving fuel, reduces operating
noise and protects the environment.
Environmental friendliness
Environmental protection is a top priority in
the design, choice of materials and manufac-
ture of your new SEAT.
Constructive measures to encourage
recycling
●
Joints and connections designed for easy
dismantling
●
Modular construction to facilitate disman-
tling
●
Increased use of single-grade materials.
●
Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in
accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and
ISO 1629.
Choice of materials
●
Use of recycled materials.
●
Use of compatible plastics in the same part
if its components are not easily separated.
●
Use of recycled materials and/or materials
originating from renewable sources.
●
Reduction of volatile components, includ-
ing odour, in plastic materials.
●
Use of CFC-free coolants.
Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions
dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive
2000/53/EC):
cadmium, lead, mercury, hexa-
v
al
ent chromium.
Manufacturing methods
●
Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the
protective wax for cavities.
●
Use of plastic film as protection during ve-
hicle transport.
●
Use of solvent-free adhesives.
●
Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-
tems.
●
Recycling and energy recovery from resi-
dues (RDF).
●
Improvement in the quality of waste water.
●
Use of systems for the recovery of residual
heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,
etc.).
●
The use of water-soluble paints.
Catalytic converter
An exhaust gas emission control system (cat-
alytic converter) that functions perfectly is vi-
tally important for vehicle operation that re-
spects the environment.
Please observe the following indications:
●
Refuel only using unleaded petrol in petrol
engine vehicles ››› page 130, Unleaded pet-
rol
.
●
Do not
a
dd too much oil to the engine
››› page 136, Checking the engine oil level.
●
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
If you are required to drive in a country where
unleaded fuel is not available, when return-
ing to a country where using a catalytic con-
verter is obligatory, the catalytic converter
must be replaced.
WARNING
●
Due to the high temperatures that the cata-
lytic converter can reach, the vehicle must be
stopped so that the catalytic converter does
not come into contact with easily flammable
material underneath the vehicle. Risk of fire!
●
Never use substances for additional under-
body protection or anti-corrosives for the ex-
haust pipes, the catalytic converter or the
heat-resistant screens. Risk of fire!
CAUTION
●
Never completely empty the tank! An irreg-
ular fuel supply can cause ignition faults,
which can result in damage to a substantial
amount of engine parts and the exhaust sys-
tem.
»
105
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
●
Refuelling just once with leaded petrol dis-
ables the exhaust system!
Economical and environmentally
friendly driving
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution
and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres de-
pends in large part on your driving style. By
adopting an economical driving style and an-
ticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can
easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%.
Some tips on how to help you reduce pollu-
tion while saving money are listed below.
Drive anticipating the traffic situation
A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating.
When you anticipate situations, you have to
brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If
it is possible, let the vehicle roll with a gear
engaged
, for example, if you see a red light
ahe
a
d. The braking effect achieved in this
way helps to reduce the wear of brakes and
tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are
reduced to zero (disconnection due to iner-
tia).
Change gear early to save energy
An effective way of saving fuel is to change
up quickly through the gears. Running the
engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses
an unnecessary amount of fuel.
Manual gearbox: shift up from first to second
gear as soon as possible. We recommend
that, whenever possible, you change to a
higher gear upon reaching 2000 rpm. Follow
the “recommended gear” indication that ap-
pears on the instrument panel ››› page 32,
Recommended gear display.
Avoid driving at high speed
We advise you not to drive at the top speed
permitted by the vehicle. Fuel consumption,
exhaust emissions and noise levels all in-
crease very rapidly at higher speeds. Driving
at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
Avoid idling
It is worthwhile switching off the engine
when waiting in a traffic jam, at level cross-
ings or at traffic lights with a long red phase.
The fuel saved after only 30 - 40 seconds is
greater than the amount of fuel needed to re-
start the engine.
The engine takes a long time to warm up
when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-
tant emissions are also especially high dur-
ing this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore
best to drive off immediately after starting
the engine. Avoid running the engine at high
speed.
Periodic maintenance
Periodic maintenance work guarantees that,
before beginning a journey, you will not con-
sume more than the required amount of fuel.
A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit
of improved fuel efficiency as well as maxi-
mum reliability and an enhanced resale val-
ue.
A badly serviced engine can consume up to
10% more fuel than necessary.
Avoid short journeys
To reduce the consumption and emission of
polluting exhaust gases, the engine and the
exhaust gas filtration systems should reach
the optimum operating temperature.
With the engine cold, fuel consumption is
proportionally higher. The engine does not
warm up and fuel consumption does not nor-
malise until having driven approximately four
kilometres (2.5 miles). This is why we recom-
mend avoiding short trips whenever possi-
ble.
Maintain the correct tyre pressures
Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an ad-
equate pressure saves fuel. If the tyre pres-
sure is just one bar (14.5 psi/100 kPa) too
low, fuel consumption can increase by as
much as 5%. Due to the greater rolling resist-
ance, under-inflation also increases tyre wear
wear and impairs handling.
106
Driving
The tyre pressures should always be checked
when the tyres are cold
.
Do not
u
se winter tyres all year round as they
increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.
Avoid unnecessary weight
Given that every kilo of extra weight will in-
crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable
to always check the luggage compartment to
make sure that no unnecessary loads are be-
ing transported.
A roof rack is often left in place for the sake
of convenience, even when it is no longer
needed. At a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph)
and 120 km/h (75 mph) your vehicle will use
about 12% more fuel as a result of the extra
wind resistance caused by the roof rack even
when it is not in use.
Save electricity
The engine activates the alternator, which
produces electricity. With the need for elec-
tricity, fuel consumption also increases. Be-
cause of this, always turn off electrical devi-
ces when you do not need them. Examples of
devices that use a lot of electricity are: the
fan at high speeds, the rear window heating
and the seat heaters*.
Note
●
If you vehicle has Start-Stop, it is not rec-
ommended to sw
itch this function off.
●
It is recommended to close the windows
when driving at more than 60 km/h (40 mph)
●
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal, as the pressure can make the
pl
ate spin, more fuel will be used and it can
burn the clutch plate lining, causing a serious
fault.
●
Do not hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch, use the foot brake or hand brake, us-
ing the latter to start. The fuel consumption
will be lower and you will prevent the clutch
plate from being damaged.
●
On descents, use the engine brake, chang-
ing to the gear that is more suitable for the
slope. Fuel consumption will be “zero” and
the brakes will not suffer.
Wading and driving off-road
Driving through water
Fig. 94 Driving through water.
To prevent the vehicle from being damaged
when driving through water (i.e. flooded
roads), please observe the following:
●
Determine the depth of the water before
entering. Water can reach a maximum height
of below the door sill ››› Fig. 94
.
●
Driv
e at
a maximum pace of walking speed.
Driving at a higher speed can cause a wave
in front of the vehicle, which can cause water
to enter the engine air intake system or other
parts of the vehicle.
●
Never stop in the water, never reverse and
never stop the engine.
●
Before driving through water deactivate the
Start-Stop system ››› page 112.
WARNING
●
Driving through water, dirt and mud can re-
duce braking capability and prolong the brak-
ing distance – Risk of accident!
●
Do not carry out any sudden or strong brak-
ing manoeuvres after driving through water.
●
Clean and dry the brakes as soon as possi-
ble after driving through water by breaking
intermittently. Carry out braking in order to
dry the brakes and clean the brake discs only
if traffic so permits. Do not put other drivers
at risk.
»
107
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
CAUTION
●
In the event of driving through water, parts
of the vehicle can be seriously damaged,
such as the engine, gearbox, catalytic con-
verter, suspension or the electrical system.
●
Oncoming vehicles that drive through wa-
ter can cause waves that exceed your vehi-
cle's permitted level for driving through wa-
ter.
●
There may be pot-holes mud or rocks under
the water that can hinder or prevent driving
through water.
●
Do not drive through salt water. The salt
can cause rust. All components that are ex-
posed to salt water must be rinsed immedi-
ately with fresh water.
Note
After driving through water we recommend
that you contact a specialised service for an
inspection.
Preventing damage to the vehicle
In order to prevent damage to the vehicle,
take special care:
●
on roads that are in poor condition,
●
when mounting kerbs,
●
when approaching very steep ramps, etc.,
●
with the parts of the vehicle situated on the
lower part of the vehicle, i.e. the spoiler, the
exhaust pipe.
This applies especially to vehicles with a very
low suspension (sport) and when the vehicle
is fully loaded.
Driver assistance systems
Braking and stability systems
Stability system (ESC)
Fig. 95 ESC system: TCS switch.
The ESC system increases control of the vehi-
cle in emergency situations, e.g. during a
sudden change in direction. Depending on
the driving conditions, it reduces the risk of
skidding and increases driving stability.
The system uses the steering wheel angle
and road speed to calculate the changes of
direction desired by the driver, and constant-
ly compares them with the actual behaviour
of the vehicle. When irregularities occur, for
example, if the vehicle begins to skid, the
ESC brakes the appropriate wheel automati-
cally.
108
Driver assistance systems
The
warning lamp on the general instru-
ment
panel starts flashing when the system
is working.
The stability (ESC) system includes the fol-
lowing systems:
●
Anti-lock brake system (ABS),
●
Traction control system (TCS),
●
Electronic differential lock (EDL),
●
Hydraulic brake assist system (HBA),
●
Hill hold control (HHC).
The ESC system cannot be switched on. The
››› Fig. 95
button can only be used to
sw
it
ch off the TCS system. The warning
lamp lights up on the general instrument
panel if the TCS system is switched off.
The ASR should be switched on at all times.
Only under certain circumstances should the
system be switched off, e.g.
●
driving with chains,
●
driving in deep snow or on very soft surfa-
ces,
●
During the “swinging movement” required
to remove a stuck vehicle
Switch the ASR back on as soon as possible.
Brake assist system (HBA)*
The HBA system is activated when you press
down on the brake pedal suddenly. It increa-
ses braking power, helping to reduce braking
distances. To reduce braking distance as
much as possible, keep the brake pedal
pressed down firmly until the vehicle comes
to a standstill.
With the help of this system, the ABS is acti-
vated more quickly and more efficiently.
The brake assist function is deactivated auto-
matically when the brake pedal is released.
Hill hold control (HHC)*
The HHC system makes it easier to start the
vehicle on hills. The system maintains the
brake pressure created by pressing down on
the brake pedal for 2 seconds after it has
been released. Your foot can be removed
from the brake pedal and you can use the ac-
celerator pedal and move away on a hill with-
out having to use the handbrake. The brake
pressure drops as the accelerator pedal is
pressed. If the vehicle cannot be started, it
will start to move backwards after 2 seconds.
The HHC is activated on gradients of over
5%, if the driver door is closed. It only works
for starting on hills, moving both forward and
in reverse. It is not activated during start-up
down hill.
Anti-lock system (ABS)
The ABS system prevents the wheels locking
during braking. This helps the driver keep
control of the vehicle.
The driver is made aware of ABS assistance
by the pulsating of the brake pedal and a
characteristic noise.
Keep the brake pedal pressed down while the
ABS is working. The ABS will switch off when
the brake pedal is released. Never brake in-
termittently while the ABS is working!
Traction control system (ASR)
If the wheels start to slip, the TCS adapts the
engine speed to the driving conditions. Par-
ticularly in unfavourable conditions, the TCS
helps starting, accelerating and hill starts.
The TCS
1)
warning lamp on the general
dash panel flashes when the system is work-
ing.
1)
Valid for vehicles not fitted with the stability con-
trol system (ESC).
109
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Electronic differential lock
If one of the wheels starts to skid, the EDL
brakes that wheel, transmitting the driving
force to the other wheels. This increases ve-
hicle stability and improves driving stability.
To prevent the disc brake of the braking
wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out au-
tomatically if subjected to excessive loads.
The vehicle will continue to function normally
without EDL. The EDL will switch on again au-
tomatically when the brake has cooled down.
Parking aid*
Functioning
Fig. 96 Parking aid: range of the sensors.
Ultrasound sensors are used so that the park-
ing aid system can calculate the distance be-
tween the rear bumper and an obstacle. The
sensors are located in the rear bumper.
Sensor range
The warning begins at a distance of 160 cm
from the obstacle (zone
A
››› Fig. 96
). As the
o
b
stacle is approached, the audible warning
sounds with increasing frequency.
Within a distance of approximately 30 cm
(zone
B
), a warning tone will sound continu-
ously. Danger zone. Stop reversing immedi-
ately!
In vehicles factory-fitted with certain audio or
radio-navigation system models, the dis-
tance from the obstacle is displayed graphi-
cally on the screen. See the audio or naviga-
tion system Instruction Manual.
In vehicles factory-fitted with a towing sys-
tem, the rear area at which the system starts
to indicate the obstacle is extended by
around 5 centimetres. The length of the vehi-
cle can be extended by a detachable towing
bracket.
In vehicles factory-fitted with towing equip-
ment, the sensors are deactivated when tow-
ing a trailer or caravan.
Switching the parking aid system on and off
Parking aid is switched on when the ignition
is on and reverse gear engaged. This is con-
firmed by a short audible warning.
Parking aid is switched off when reverse gear
is released.
WARNING
●
Parking aid does not free the driver from re-
sponsibility when parking or performing sim-
ilar manoeuvres. Pay special attention to
small children or animals, as the parking aid
sensors may not always be able to detect
them.
●
Before reversing or parking, make sure
there are no small obstacles, e.g. rocks, nar-
row pillars, towing brackets, etc. in front or
behind the vehicle. These obstacles may not
always be detected by the parking aid device.
●
The surface of certain objects may not re-
flect the signals of the parking aid sensors.
Therefore, people wearing clothing of this
kind may not be detected by the parking aid
system.
●
Outside noise may interfere with the park-
ing aid system. Under certain unfavourable
circumstances, certain objects or people may
not be detected.
Note
●
If a constant sound at a higher frequency is
emitted for 3 seconds each time the system is
switched on, there is a fault in the system.
Please take the vehicle to a specialised tech-
nical service to repair this fault.
110
Driver assistance systems
●
To ensure that the parking aid system
works properly, the sensors must be kept
clean (e.g. free of ice).
●
If the parking aid system is switched on
when the automatic gearbox selector lever is
in position P, the acoustic signal will be inter-
rupted (the car cannot be moved).
Cruise control*
Introduction
The cruise control system allows you to drive
at a constant speed of 30 km/h (19 mph) or
higher without having to press the accelera-
tor. However, the speed is only maintained
within the margin permitted by the engine
power and the braking effect of the engine.
The warning lamp lights up on the general
instrument panel if cruise control is switched
on.
WARNING
●
For safety reasons the cruise control sys-
tem must not be used in dense traffic or
where roads conditions are poor (e.g. due to
ice, aquaplaning, loose grit, snow). – Risk of
accident!
●
The programmed speed can only be re-es-
tablished if it is not too high for current traf-
fic conditions.
●
Always switch the cruise control system off
after using it in order to avoid involuntary
use.
CAUTION
●
The cruise control cannot maintain a con-
stant speed when the vehicle is moving
downhill. The vehicle tends to accelerate un-
der its own weight. Therefore, shift down or
use the brake pedal in good time to slow the
vehicle.
Note
●
In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, the
cruise control system cannot be switched on
if the selector lever is in position P, N or R.
●
In vehicles with a manual gearbox, the
cruise control cannot be switched on if first
gear or reverse gear is engaged.
Setting speed
Fig. 97 Turn signal and main beam headlight
lever: cruise control buttons.
Setting speed
–
Move knob
A
››› Fig. 97 to the ON posi-
tion.
–
Briefly press rocker switch
B
in
SET
posi-
tion when
you have reached the speed you
wish to set.
On releasing rocker switch
B
in
SET
, the cur-
r
ent speed is stored and will remain constant
without having to press the accelerator ped-
al.
111
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Adjusting set speed
Increasing speed by pressing the accelerator
pedal
–
Press the accelerator to increase the speed
of the vehicle.
–
Release the accelerator and the previously
programmed speed will be resumed.
If, when pressing the accelerator, the vehicle
exceeds the programmed speed by more
than 10 km/h (6 mph) for more than 3 mi-
nutes, the set speed will be deleted. The
speed will have to be stored again.
Increasing speed by pressing switch
B
–
Press rocker switch
B
›››
Fig. 97
›››
page 111
in
RES
.
–
If the button is held down in the RES posi-
tion, the speed increases continuously. Re-
lease the switch when the required speed
is reached. The speed is stored.
Setting a lower speed
–
The set speed can be reduced by pressing
switch
B
›››
Fig. 97
›
›
›
page 111 in SET.
–
If the button is held down in the SET posi-
tion, the speed decreases continuously. Re-
lease the switch when the required speed
is reached. The speed is stored.
–
On releasing the switch at speeds of less
than 30 km/h (19 mph), no speed will be
set and the memory will be deleted. The ve-
hicle must be moving at a speed of over
30 km/h (19 mph) and switch
B
pressed
again to
SET
for it to be set.
The s
peed can be reduced by pressing the
brake pedal, which temporarily switches off
the cruise control.
Switching off cruise control
temporarily
Cruise control is switched off temporarily by
pressing switch
A
››› Fig. 97
›
›› p
age 111 in
CANCEL or by pressing the brake or clutch
pedal.
The set speed is stored.
To recover the set speed, briefly press switch
B
in
RES
once you have released the brake
or c
lutch pedal.
Switching off cruise control
completely
–
Move knob
A
›››
Fig. 97
›››
page 111 to
OFF
.
St
ar
t-Stop* System
Functioning
Fig. 98 Instrument panel: Start-Stop system
button
The Start-Stop system helps save fuel and re-
duce harmful and CO
2
emissions.
The system is automatically switched on ev-
ery time the ignition is switched on.
The system automatically switches off the en-
gine when the vehicle is stationary, e.g. wait-
ing at traffic lights.
The current status of the Start-Stop system is
displayed on the general instrument panel
display.
Automatic engine shut down (Stop phase)
–
Stop the vehicle (if necessary using the
handbrake).
–
Shift to neutral.
112
Driver assistance systems
–
Release the clutch pedal.
Automatic engine start up (Start phase)
–
Press the clutch.
Switching the Start-Stop system on and off
The Start-Stop system can be switched on
and off by pressing the
››› Fig. 98
button.
The w
arnin
g lamp in the button will light up
when the system is switched off.
If the vehicle is in Stop phase when the but-
ton is pressed, the engine will start immedi-
ately.
The Start-Stop system works under complex
driving conditions that are difficult to detect
without specialist technology. The set of nec-
essary conditions for the correct operating of
the Start-Stop system are indicated below.
Conditions for automatic engine shut down
(Stop phase)
●
Selector lever in neutral.
●
Clutch pedal not pressed.
●
Driver with seat belt fastened.
●
Driver door closed.
●
The bonnet closed.
●
Vehicle stationary.
●
The factory-fitted towing bracket is not elec-
trically connected to a trailer.
●
Engine at operating temperature.
●
Vehicle's battery sufficiently charged.
●
Vehicle not on a very steep slope
●
Engine speed below 1,200 rpm.
●
Vehicle battery temperature is neither too
high nor too low.
●
Sufficient brake system pressure.
●
Difference between outside temperature
and set interior temperature not too great
●
Vehicle speed since the last time the en-
gine started was above 3 km/h (2 mph).
●
Particulate filter not being cleaned
››› page 37.
●
Front wheels not overly turned (steering
wheel turned less than three quarters of a
turn)
Conditions for engine start up (Start phase)
●
Clutch pedal pressed.
●
Max./min. temperature set.
●
Windscreen defrost function switched on.
●
High blower speed.
●
Start-Stop button pressed.
Conditions for automatic engine start up
without driver involvement
●
Vehicle moving at a speed of over 3 km/h
(2 mph).
●
Difference between outside temperature
and interior temperature is too great
●
Vehicle's battery insufficiently charged.
●
Insufficient brake system pressure.
If the driver seat belt is unfastened for more
than 30 seconds in Stop phase, the engine
must be started using the ignition key.
Please observe the messages on the general
instrument panel display.
Warnings on the instrument panel display
(valid for vehicles not fitted with an
informative display)
FAULT: Start-Stop Fault in the Start-Stop sys-
tem
START-STOP IMPOSSIBLE Engine cannot be auto-
matically shut down
START-STOP ACTIVE Automatic engine shut
down (Stop phase)
SWITCH OFF IGNITION Switch the ignition off
START MANUALLY Start the engine manually
WARNING
●
If the engine is switched off, neither the
brake servo nor the power steering will work.
●
Do not move the vehicle when the engine is
switched off.
»
113
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
CAUTION
Switch off the Start-Stop system ››› page 107
before driving through a pool of water on the
road.
Note
●
The battery temperature may reflect
changes in outside temperature after several
hours. If the vehicle has been stopped out-
side at temperatures below zero or in direct
sunlight, for example, the battery tempera-
ture may take several hours to reach the val-
ues required for the correct operating of the
Start-Stop system.
●
If the Climatronic system is operating auto-
matically, this could impair automatic engine
shut down under certain conditions.
Towing bracket device
Driving the vehicle with a
trailer
Technical requirements
If your vehicle has a factory-fitted towing
bracket or is equipped with a selection of
SEAT Original Accessories, it meets all the rel-
evant technical and legal requirements.
In vehicles with a towing bracket it is possi-
ble to remove the ball joint, situated (togeth-
er with the special assembly instructions) in
the housing for the spare wheel in the vehi-
cle luggage compartment
›››
page 150, Vehi-
cle tool kit*
.
Y
our
vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power
socket for the electrical connection between
the trailer and the vehicle. If the trailer you
are going to use has a 7-pin connector, the
corresponding adaptor, acquired from the
SEAT Original Accessories Catalogue, can be
used.
If a towing bracket is to be retro-fitted to the
car, it must be done according to the instruc-
tions of the towing bracket manufacturer.
Note
Any queries that may arise can be directed to
an authorised SEAT dealer.
Trailer weight
Trailer weight
The combined vehicle and trailer must be
balanced. To do so use the maximum permit-
ted towing bracket load. An insufficient
weight exerted by the trailer drawbar on the
ball joint of the towing bracket will have a
negative impact upon the response of the ve-
hicle-trailer assembly on the road.
Weight distribution
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy
objects are as near to the axle as possible.
Ensure that the objects do not move.
If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer
loaded then the load distribution is incorrect.
However, if these conditions cannot be avoi-
ded, drive very slowly.
Tyre pressure values
Correct the tyre pressure in your vehicle to
“total load”
›››
page 144, Life cycle of tyres.
Trailer weight
Never exceed the authorised trailer weight
under any circumstances
›››
page 174, Tech-
nical specifications.
The trailer weights listed are only applicable
for
altitudes
up to 1000 m above sea level.
D
ue to lower air density, engine power de-
creases depending on the increase in
114
Towing bracket device
altitude, this also reduces climbing ability,
which requires a reduction of the weight of
the vehicle with a trailer by 10% for every
1000 m increase in altitude. The weight of
the assembly is calculated by adding the ve-
hicle weight (loaded) to the trailer weight
(loaded). Always drive with special care when
towing a trailer.
The towed load and support load information
that is displayed on the towing bracket man-
ufacturers label are only values for the verifi-
cation of the device. The correct figures for
your specific vehicle, which are usually lower
than these figures, are given in the documen-
tation of your vehicle.
WARNING
●
Exceeding the maximum established load
per axle and the maximum towing bracket
load in addition to the maximum permitted
load or the load of the vehicle + trailer as-
sembly can cause accidents and serious inju-
ries.
●
A sliding load can considerably affect the
stability and safety of the vehicle + trailer as-
sembly, resulting in accidents and serious in-
juries.
Towing a trailer
Exterior mirrors
Check whether you can see enough of the
road behind the trailer with the standard rear
vision mirrors. If this is not the case, you
should have additional exterior mirrors fitted.
Observe the relevant statutory requirements
of the country you are in.
Headlights
Before starting a journey, also check the
headlight beam settings with the trailer
hitched up. Adjust the headlight range set-
tings if necessary
›››
page 62, Range control
of main lights .
Driving speed
For your own safety do not drive faster than
the maximum permitted speed indicated on
the trailer.
At all times, immediately reduce speed if you
detect the slightest swaying movement of the
trailer. Never try to “return the trailer to a
straight position” by accelerating.
Brakes
Brake in due course! If the trailer has an over-
run brake
, apply the brakes gently at first and
then, firm
ly
. This will prevent the jerking that
can be caused by locking of trailer wheels.
Change to a lower gear in good time before
descending a slope in order to take advant-
age of the engine brake.
The trailer is incorporated into the vehicle's
anti-theft alarm system:
●
When the vehicle has a factory-fitted anti-
theft alarm and a towing bracket.
●
When the trailer is electrically connected to
the vehicle via the towing bracket socket.
●
When the vehicle electrical device and the
towing bracket are operational.
●
When the vehicle is locked and the vehi-
cle's anti-theft alarm device is activated.
Once the electrical connection is interrupted
with the vehicle trailer locked, the alarm
sounds.
Always switch off the vehicle anti-theft alarm
device before connecting or disconnecting a
trailer. The vehicle anti-theft alarm device
could cause the alarm to sound ››› page 57,
Anti-theft alarm system*.
Engine overheating
In the event that the coolant temperature
gauge needle moves to the right section of
the scale or to the red area, immediately re-
duce speed. If the control lamp flashes on
the general instrument panel, stop the vehi-
cle and switch off the engine. Wait several
minutes and check the coolant level in the
tank ››› page 138.
»
115
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Please observe the following indications
››› page 35, Coolant level and temperature
.
The coolant temperature can be reduced by
switching on the heating.
WARNING
●
Adjust your speed to suit the road and traf-
fic conditions.
●
An electrical installation that is connected
incorrectly or by non-specialised personnel
can prevent the connection of the current to
the trailer and cause faults in the operation of
the electrical system throughout the entire
vehicle, leading to accidents and serious in-
jury.
●
All electrical work must be carried out only
by specialised services.
●
Never directly connect the trailer electrical
device to the electrical sockets of the reverse
driving lights or other sources of electrical
current.
CAUTION
●
Avoid corners, and sudden and sharp brak-
ing.
●
Once the trailing arm has been removed,
place the corresponding cover on the hole of
the fastening point. This prevents dirt from
entering the hole – see the trailer system as-
sembly manual.
Note
●
In the event of frequent journeys with a
trailer, we recommend also having the vehi-
cle inspected in between the service inter-
vals.
●
When connecting and disconnecting the
trailer, the handbrake must be applied.
●
For technical reasons, trailers with LED re-
verse lights cannot be incorporated into the
vehicle anti-theft alarm system.
Towing bracket device
Introduction
If the vehicle is equipped with a towing
bracket device from the factory or is a genu-
ine SEAT accessory, it meets all national tech-
nical and legal requirements for towing.
Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin power
socket for the electrical connection between
the trailer and the vehicle. If the towing
bracket is equipped with a 7-pin connector
,
y
ou c
an use the corresponding available
adaptor that is a genuine SEAT accessory.
The towing device has a maximum vertical
load of 50 kg.
WARNING
●
Before driving with the ball-headed bar fit-
ted, verify its correct assembly and place-
ment in the clamping bush.
●
Do not use the ball-headed bar if it is not
correctly placed and fixed in the clamping
bush.
●
Do not use the towing device for towing if it
is damaged or has missing parts.
●
Do not modify or adapt the towing device
connection.
●
Never disengage the ball-headed bar with
the trailer still hitched.
CAUTION
Be careful not to damage the paint on the
bumper when handling the ball-headed bar.
116
Towing bracket device
Description
Fig. 99 Towing bracket device support for
hitching/ball-headed bar.
The ball-headed bar is detachable. It is loca-
ted in the spare wheel compartment or in the
spare wheel compartment in the boot
››› page 150, Vehicle tool kit*.
Key to ››› Fig. 99
13-pin socket
Safety flange
1
2
Clamping bush
Clamping bush cap
Ball head cover
Ball-headed bar
Locking balls
Centred
Red marking on the manual regulator
Manual regulator
Key
Key slot cover
Red marking on the manual regulator
White marking on the ball-headed bar
Note
Contact an Authorised Service Partner if you
lose your key.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Placing in service position
Fig. 100 Placing in service position.
»
117
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
Fig. 101 Service position.
Before assembling, place the ball-headed bar
in service position.
–
Turn key
A
fully in the direction of arrow
1
››› Fig. 100
.
–
Ho
l
d the ball-headed bar with your left
hand.
–
Pull manual regulator
B
outward in the di-
rection of arrow
2
and turn it fully in the
direction of arrow
3
.
The manual regulator will remain in this posi-
tion.
Service position
›
›› Fig. 101
●
K
ey
C
is in an open position – the key ar-
row points to the “unlocked” symbol. The key
cannot be removed from the key slot.
●
The
D
locking balls may be fully inserted
into the body of the ball-headed bar by ap-
plying some pressure.
●
The red
E
marking on the manual regula-
tor points towards the white marking on the
ball-headed bar.
●
Between the manual regulator and the
body of the ball-headed bar there is a clearly
visible space of approximately 4 mm
F
.
Once the ball-headed bar has been posi-
tioned like this, it will be ready to be placed
in the clamping bush.
WARNING
Do not use the ball-headed bar if it cannot be
correctly placed in the service position.
CAUTION
The key cannot be removed from the manual
regulator key slot when it is in the service po-
sition.
Assembling the ball-headed bar
Fig. 102 Placing the ball-headed bar/locking
and removing the key.
118
Towing bracket device
Fig. 103 Placing the key slot cover.
–
Remove the cap from the clamping bush
4
››› Fig. 99
by pulling downwards.
–
Pl
ac
e the ball-headed bar in the service po-
sition ››› page 117.
–
Hold the ball-headed bar from underneath
››› Fig. 102 and push it into the clamping
bush as far as possible until you hear it
click into place ›››
.
The manual regulator
A
automatically turns
in the op
po
site direction, adjusting to the
ball-headed bar ›››
.
–
Switch off the manual regulator lock with
key
B
by turning the key fully to the right
in the direction of arrow
1
– the arrow in
the key displays the “locked” symbol.
–
Remove the key in the direction of arrow
2
.
–
Place cover
C
over the manual regulator
lock in the direction of arrow
3
››› Fig. 103
.
–
V
erif
y the correct placement of the ball-
headed bar ››› page 119.
WARNING
●
Do not hold the manual regulator with your
hand when fitting the ball-headed bar since
you could sustain injuries to your fingers.
●
When mounting the ball-headed bar, al-
ways lock it with a key and remove the key
from the slot.
●
The ball-headed bar must not be in the
service position with the key in the key slot.
●
If the ball-headed bar is not placed in the
service position you will not be able to place
it in the clamping bush.
CAUTION
When removing the key, always place the
cover over the key slot of the manual regula-
tor to prevent dirt from entering.
Note
Once removed, place the clamping bush cap
in an appropriate location in the boot.
Verification of correct placement
Fig. 104 Correct placement of the ball-head-
ed bar.
Before using the ball-headed bar, ensure it is
correctly fitted.
Ensure that:
●
The ball-headed bar does not come out of
the clamping bush in a “jerky” manner.
●
The red mark
A
››› Fig. 104
on the manual
r
e
gulator signals toward the white mark on
the ball-headed bar.
●
The manual regulator is adjusted to the
ball-headed bar, leaving no space between
them.
●
The regulator is locked and the key has
been removed.
●
Cover
B
has been placed over the manual
regulator lock.
»
119
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Operation
WARNING
Only use the towing bracket device when the
ball-headed bar is properly fitted!
Disassembly of the ball-headed bar
Fig. 105 Remove the key slot cover/unlock
with the key.
Fig. 106 Unblock the ball-headed bar.
–
Remove cover
A
from over the regulator
key slot in the direction of arrow
1
››› Fig. 105
.
–
In
ser
t key
B
in the key slot.
–
Open the manual regulator lock by turning
key
B
fully to the left in the direction of ar-
row
2
. The arrow on the key points to the
“unlocked” symbol.
–
Hold the ball-headed bar from underneath
››› Fig. 106
and remove manual regulator
C
with your other hand in the direction of
arrow
3
.
–
Turn the removed regulator fully in the di-
rection of arrow
4
and hold it firmly in this
position.
–
Remove the ball-headed bar from the
clamping bush, pulling downward in the di-
rection of arrow
5
.
The ball-headed bar should be placed in the
service position so that it is ready to be inser-
ted into the clamping bush ››› .
–
Place the cover over the clamping bush
4
››› Fig. 99
.
WARNING
●
Never leave the ball-headed bar unsecured
in the boot. It could be damaged in the event
of sudden braking, putting the safety of pas-
sengers at risk!
●
Never disassemble the ball-headed bar
with the trailer still hitched.
CAUTION
●
If you do not turn the manual regulator
fully, it will return to its original position
when the ball-headed bar is removed. The
manual regulator will be stuck to the ball-
headed bar and you will not be able to put it
in the service position. Therefore, before you
assemble it again, you must place the ball-
headed bar in this position.
●
When disassembling, place the cap on the
clamping bush holder’s key slot. This way
you will prevent dirt from entering the clamp-
ing bush.
Note
●
Before disassembling the ball-headed bar,
we recommend placing the cover on the ball
head.
120
Towing bracket device
●
Clean the ball-headed bar thoroughly be-
fore returning it to the on-board toolbox.
Use and maintenance
Cover the clamping bush with the cap to pre-
vent dirt from entering.
Before hooking on the trailer, check the ball
head and, if necessary, lubricate it with ade-
quate lubricant.
Place the protective cover over the ball head
when storing the bar. This way, you will avoid
getting the boot dirty.
If it gets dirty, clean and dry the clamping
bush thoroughly with an appropriate prod-
uct.
CAUTION
The top part of the clamping bush opening is
lubricated. Be careful not to remove this lu-
brication.
121
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
Advice
Care and maintenance
Accessories and modifications
to the vehicle
Accessories, replacement parts and
repairs
If you wish to retrofit accessories in the vehi-
cle, or if a part of the vehicle has been re-
placed by a new part or technical modifica-
tions are required, the following instructions
must be taken into account:
●
Before
purchasing accessories or spare
p
ar
ts and before making technical modifica-
tions, always request advice from an Author-
ised SEAT dealer
›››
.
●
In the event that technical modifications
are carried out on the vehicle, the instruc-
tions and regulations specified by the com-
pany, SEAT, must be observed.
No damage will be caused to the vehicle if
the established procedures are respected,
which guarantees safe driving and operation.
After the modifications are carried out, the
vehicle will comply with the restrictions and
regulations of the highway code. More infor-
mation can be obtained at an Authorised
SEAT dealer, where all jobs required can be
carried out appropriately.
Vehicle improvements and modifications
The owner must keep the technical documen-
tation regarding the modifications carried out
on the vehicle so it can be handed over to
those responsible for processing end-of-life
vehicles. This ensures end-of-life processing
of the vehicle, while protecting the environ-
ment.
Work done on the electrical components and
software can cause disruption in operations.
Due to the interconnection of electronic com-
ponents, their malfunction can also impair
systems that are not directly affected. This
can adversely affect reliability of the vehicle,
and can produce excessive wear of the parts.
Damage caused by technical modifications
that are not made with the consent of SEAT
will be excluded from the warranty – see war-
ranty certificate.
WARNING
●
Jobs or modifications unduly carried out on
your vehicle can cause disruption to opera-
tions - Risk of accident!
●
We recommend that you use only expressly
authorised SEAT Accessories and SEAT Origi-
nal Spare Parts for your vehicle. The reliabili-
ty, safety and compatibility with your vehicle
of SEAT original spare parts and accessories
has been verified.
●
Despite the continuous observation of the
market, we cannot judge nor guarantee the
suitability of other products for your vehicle,
be they authorised products or products ap-
proved by a state testing facility.
Note
SEAT original spare parts and accessories can
be purchased at authorised SEAT dealers
where the purchased parts can also be fitted.
Modifications and effects of the
airbag system
In the adjustment and modification, respect
the SEAT directive.
Modifications and corrections of the front
bumper, doors, front seats, roof or bodywork
must be carried out at authorised SEAT work-
shops. Components of the airbag system can
be found in these parts of the vehicle.
WARNING
●
Airbag modules must never be repaired.
They must be replaced.
●
Never fit components of the airbag system
removed from old vehicles or those originat-
ing from a recycling process in the vehicle.
122
Care and maintenance
●
The modification of the suspension of the
vehicle wheels, including the use of non-per-
mitted combinations of tyres and rims can al-
ter the operation of the airbag system and in-
crease the risk of serious or fatal injuries in
an accident.
●
During all jobs on the airbag system, in ad-
dition to the removal and fitting of parts of
the system in the course of other repair jobs,
parts of the airbag system can be damaged.
Therefore in the event of an accident, this
may cause the airbags to activate incorrectly
or not activate at all.
Care and cleaning
Introduction
Regular and suitable care helps to maintain
the useful life of your vehicle. This may also
be one of the requirements for upholding any
warranty claims in the event of corrosion or
paint defects.
We recommend you use cleaning products
from the SEAT Original Accessories pro-
gramme available in SEAT dealers. Please fol-
low the instructions for use on the packag-
ing.
WARNING
●
Cleaning products and other materials used
for car care can damage the health if mis-
used.
●
Always keep car care materials in a safe
place out of the reach of children. Risk of poi-
soning!
●
When washing the car during the winter
season: Moisture and ice on the brakes may
affect braking efficiency. Risk of accident!
●
The ignition must always be switched off
when the car is washed. Risk of accident!
●
Do not clean the underside of the car or in-
side the wheel arches without protecting your
hands and arms. You may cut yourself on
sharp metal parts!
●
Perfumes and air fresheners inside the ve-
hicle may be harmful to health at high tem-
peratures in the interior.
CAUTION
●
Check the colour-fastness of your clothing
to avoid damaging or visibly staining the fab-
ric (leather), upholstery and fabric trim.
●
Cleaning products containing solvents may
damage the material being cleaned.
●
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Risk of damage to paintwork.
●
If washing the vehicle with a hose in win-
ter, do not direct the jet of water directly at
the locks or at the door seals or bonnet. Risk
of freezing.
●
Do not use sponges for removing insects or
abrasive household sponges, etc. on painted
surfaces. Risk of damage to the painted sur-
face!
●
Do not put stickers on the inner side of the
rear window in areas where heating elements
or the aerial are located. This could cause
damage and, in the case of the aerial, radio
and navigation system reception faults.
●
Do not clean the inside of the window with
sharp objects or corrosive or acidic cleaning
products. Risk of damaging the heating ele-
ments or the aerial.
●
Do not attach any fragrance or air freshener
to the dash panel. Risk of damage to the
dash panel!
●
To avoid damaging the parking aid system
sensors, spray them only briefly at a mini-
mum distance of 10 cm when cleaning the ve-
hicle with a high-pressure or steam cleaner.
●
Do not clean the roof panel with a brush.
Risk of damage to the panel surface!
For the sake of the environment
●
The packaging of the product used to care
for your vehicle is hazardous waste. It must
be disposed of according to current local law.
●
Only wash the car in special wash bays.
»
123
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
Note
●
Remove stains from fresh ball-pen and oth-
er inks, lipstick, shoe cream and similar
stains on the fabric (leather), upholstery and
fabric trim as soon as possible.
●
We recommend that you visit an authorised
SEAT dealer to clean and care for the interior
of your vehicle, due to the problems that may
arise when cleaning and caring for the interi-
or of your vehicle and to the utensils and
knowledge required.
Washing the vehicle
The best protection of the vehicle from the
harmful influences of the environment in-
volves frequent
washing and waxing. The fre-
quency
w
ith which the vehicle is washed de-
pends on many different factors, such as:
●
Frequency of use
●
Type of parking (garage, underneath trees,
etc.)
●
Time of year
●
Weather conditions
●
Environmental conditions
The longer substances such as insects, bird
droppings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, in-
dustrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and
other aggressive materials remain on the
paintwork, the more damage they do. High
temperatures (for instance in strong sunlight)
further intensify the corrosive effect.
After the winter season, it is important to
have the underside of the vehicle washed
thoroughly.
Automatic car washes
Your vehicle can be washed in an automatic
car wash.
Before going through an automatic car wash,
be sure to take the usual precautions such as
closing the windows, etc.
If the vehicle has special accessories such as
spoilers or a roof rack or two-way radio aerial,
etc., it is advisable to consult the car wash
operator beforehand.
The windscreen wiper rubbers must be de-
greased after going after the car wash and
waxing.
Washing by hand
When washing the car by hand, use plenty of
water to soften the dirt first and rinse off as
well as possible.
Then clean the vehicle with a sponge, glove
or
brush
. Start on the roof and work down.
U
se only slight pressure when cleaning the
painted surfaces of the vehicle. A car sham-
poo should only be used for very persistent
dirt.
Rinse the sponge or glove thoroughly and of-
ten.
Wheels, sills and underside should be
cleaned last. Use a second sponge for this.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly
and then dry with a chamois.
Washing with high-pressure cleaners
When cleaning the vehicle with a high-pres-
sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-
structions for the equipment. This particular-
ly applies to the operating pressure and the
distance
of the spray from the surface of the
v
ehic
le. Do not hold the spray nozzle too
close to the parking aid system sensors and
soft materials, such as rubber hoses or insu-
lating material.
WARNING
Do no use a nozzle that sprays the water out
in a direct stream or one that has a “rotating
jet”!
CAUTION
Do not use water hotter than +60 °C (140 °F).
Risk of damage to the vehicle!
124
Care and maintenance
Waxing and polishing of the vehicle
paintwork
Care
To a great extent, good waxing protects the
vehicle surface from the harmful effects of
the environment.
The vehicle must be treated with a high qual-
ity, hard wax when water no longer forms
droplets on clean paintwork.
A new coat of high quality, hard wax can be
applied to the clean, painted surface only
when it has fully dried. Even if a wax solution
is used regularly in the car wash, it is advisa-
ble to protect the paint with a coat of wax at
least twice a year.
Polishing
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has
lost its shine, and the gloss cannot be
brought back by applying wax.
The vehicle must be waxed after polishing if
the polish used does not contain wax com-
pounds to seal the paint.
CAUTION
●
Never wax the windows.
●
Do not use polishes and hard wax on pain-
ted parts with a matt finish or on plastic
parts.
●
Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or
dusty environment.
Cleaning chrome
Clean the chrome first with a clean cloth and
then buff up with a soft, dry cloth. If this does
not clean the chrome properly, use a special
chrome cleaner.
CAUTION
Do not polish the chrome in a dusty environ-
ment or it could be scratched.
Paint damage
Minor damage to the paint, such as scratches
or stone chips, should be touched up without
delay using paint.
Suitable
touch-up brushes or sprays for the
c
o
lour of your vehicle can be purchased from
authorised SEAT dealers.
Note
We recommend you leave paint damage re-
pairs to a SEAT Authorised Service.
Plastic parts
Exterior plastic parts will come clean using a
damp cloth. If this is not sufficient, plastic
parts can also be treated with special sol-
vent-free plastic cleaning detergents.
Do not u
se paint cleaners, polishes or wax on
plastic parts.
Windows and exterior mirrors
Remove snow and ice from windows and rear
vision mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To
avoid damaging the surface of the glass, the
scraper should only be pushed in one direc-
tion and not moved to and fro.
The windows should also be cleaned on the
inside at regular intervals.
Use a separate cloth or chamois to dry the
windows and rear vision mirrors.
Do not use the chamois used to polish the
bodywork to dry the windows. Waxing and
polishing residues could cause smears on
the glass and hinder visibility.
CAUTION
●
Never use hot or boiling water to remove
snow and ice from the windows. Risk of crack-
ing glass!
»
125
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
●
Make sure you do not damage the paint-
work on the vehicle on removing snow and
ice from the windows and rear vision mirrors.
●
Do not remove the snow or ice dirty with
thick particles, e.g. gravel, sand or road salt,
from windows and mirrors. Risk of damage to
the glass and mirror surfaces.
Radio reception and aerial
In vehicles factory-fitted with an audio or
navigation system, the aerial may be instal-
led in different places:
●
inside the rear window next to the heating
elements,
●
on the roof of the vehicle.
Headlights
Use soap and clean, hot water to clean the
front headlights.
CAUTION
●
Never rub the headlights to dry them and
do not use sharp objects to clean the plastic
glass material. These could damage the pro-
tective paint and cause the headlights to
crack.
●
Do not use aggressive cleaning products or
chemical solvents to clean the glass. This
could damage the headlights.
Care of rubber seals
The weatherstrips on doors and windows will
remain pliable and last longer if they are oc-
casionally treated with a suitable rubber care
product. This will prevent premature ageing
and leaks. If they are properly cared for, the
seals will be less likely to freeze up in the
winter.
Door lock cylinder
Special products must be used to defrost
lock cylinders.
Note
●
Make sure, when washing the vehicle, that
the least amount of water possible enters the
lock cylinders.
●
We recommend the use of products from
the selection of SEAT Original Accessories to
care for the door lock cylinder.
Wheels
Wheel trims
If you wash the vehicle regularly, you should
also thoroughly wash the wheel trim. Regu-
larly remove any brake dust and road salt
from the wheels, otherwise the wheel materi-
al could be damaged. Repair any damage to
the wheel paintwork immediately.
Alloy wheels
After thorough washing, treat the wheels
with a protective product for alloy wheels. Do
not use abrasive products to care for the
wheels.
WARNING
Moisture, ice and road salt may affect braking
efficiency. Risk of accident!
CAUTION
Heavy dirt on the wheels could lead to their
misalignment. This could result in vibrations
being transmitted to the steering wheel that
under certain conditions may cause prema-
ture steering wear. This dirt must be re-
moved.
Note
We recommend you leave paint damage re-
pairs to a SEAT Authorised Service.
126
Care and maintenance
Underbody sealant
The underside of the vehicle is coated to per-
manently protect it from chemical and me-
chanical agents.
Given that damage to the protective coating
during driving cannot be completely ruled
out, we recommend you check the condition
of the protective coating on the underbody
and suspension at regular intervals, prefera-
bly before the start and end of the coldest
season of the year.
Authorised SEAT dealers have suitable spe-
cial products and the necessary facilities and
are aware of the techniques required for their
application. We therefore recommend all
touch-up work or additional anti-corrosion
measures be performed by an authorised
SEAT dealer.
WARNING
Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion
coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic con-
verter, particulate filter or heat shields on the
exhaust system. Once the engine has
reached operating temperature, these sub-
stances could catch fire. Risk of fire!
Cavity waxing
All cavities on the vehicle exposed to corro-
sion are permanently factory-protected by a
wax solution.
This wax solution does not need to be
checked or touched up. Should wax run out
of the cavities at high ambient temperatures,
remove it using a plastic scraper and clean
away any stains using lighter fluid.
WARNING
Note the regulations concerning safety and
environmental protection if you use lighter
fluid to remove the wax. Risk of fire!
Leatherette and upholstery
Leatherette can be cleaned with a damp
cloth. If this is not sufficient, these parts
should only be cleaned with solvent-free
plastic care and cleaning products.
Textile covers and trim parts on doors, boot
lid, etc. can be cleaned with special deter-
gents, e.g. dry foam. A soft sponge or brush
or a micro-fibre cloth for normal cleaning can
be used. Use special products to clean the
headliner.
The dye used in many garments, for example
dark jeans, is not always sufficiently colour-
fast. Seat upholstery (fabric and leather), es-
pecially when light-coloured, may visibly dis-
colour if the dye comes out of clothing, even
in normal conditions. This is not an uphols-
tery defect but indicates that the dye in the
item of clothing is not solid enough.
Heated seat upholstery
Do not clean the seat upholstery with damp
products, as this could damage the seat
heatin
g system.
Clean the upholstery with special products,
e.g. dry foam, etc.
Natural leather
Leather should be looked after from time to
time, depending on its use.
Normal cleaning
Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with water
and wipe over the leather surfaces.
More stubborn dirt
Do not let water soak through the leather or
penetrate the seams.
Dry it with a soft, dry cloth.
»
127
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
Removing stains
Remove fresh
water-based
stains such as cof-
f
ee, tea, juices, blood, etc. with an absorbent
cloth or kitchen roll. Use the special deter-
gent to clean dried-on stains.
Remove fresh fat-based stains such as but-
ter, mayonnaise, chocolate, etc. with an ab-
sorbent cloth or paper towel or use the spe-
cial detergent if the stain has not yet soaked
through the surface.
Use a grease-dissolving product to treat
dried-in, fat-based stains.
Treat less common stains such as ball-pen
and other inks, felt-tip pens, nail polish,
emulsion paint, shoe cream etc. with a spe-
cial leather stain remover.
Leather care
The leather should be treated regularly
(about twice a year) with a leather-care prod-
uct.
Apply the protective product very sparingly.
Dry the leather with a soft, dry cloth.
CAUTION
●
Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight
for long periods so that it does not lose its
colour. If the car is left for a prolonged period
outdoors, cover the leather so that it does
not lose its colour.
●
Sharp-edged objects on clothing, such as
zips, rivets or belts can leave permanent
scratches and rough marks on the surface of
the leather.
●
Use of a mechanical steering wheel lock
can damage the leather surface of the steer-
ing wheel.
Note
●
Use a suitable impregnating cream with ul-
tra-violet protection at regular intervals and
after cleaning. The cream will nourish and
moisturise the leather, keep it supple and
able to breathe. In addition, it will also help
to protect the surface of the leather.
●
Clean the leather every 2 to 3 months and
remove fresh dirt as necessary.
●
Preserve the colour of the leather. A special
coloured cream for leather will renew the col-
our of more heavily worn areas as required.
●
Leather is a natural material with specific
properties. During vehicle use, the appear-
ance of parts of the leather covers may
change; folds or wrinkles may appear as a re-
sult of their use.
Seat belts
Keep the seat belts clean!
Wash soiled seat belts with mild, soapy wa-
ter, removing any heavier dirt with a soft
brush.
Check the condition of all seat belts at regu-
lar intervals.
Very soiled belts may not retract properly.
WARNING
●
The seat belts should never be removed
from the vehicle for cleaning.
●
Never clean using chemical products, as
chemical detergents destroy the fabric. En-
sure that the seat belts do not come into con-
tact with corrosive fluids such as acids, etc.
●
If you find any damage to the belt webbing,
belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,
the belt in question must be replaced by an
Official Service.
●
Make sure that the inertia reel seat belts
are completely dry before allowing them to
retract.
128
Checking and refilling levels
Checking and refilling levels
Fuel
Introduction
The correct type of fuel for your vehicle is in-
dicated on a sticker on the inside of the fuel
tank flap, along with the tyre size and pres-
sure ››› Fig. 107 .
WARNING
Observe all relevant statutory regulations on
transporting spare fuel canisters. For safety
reasons, we do not recommend carrying a
spare canister in the vehicle. The canister
could be damaged in an accident and fuel
may leak. Risk of fire!
CAUTION
●
Never completely empty the tank! An irreg-
ular fuel supply can cause ignition faults,
which can result in damage to a substantial
amount of engine parts and the exhaust sys-
tem.
●
If any fuel is spilt onto the paintwork of the
vehicle, it should be removed immediately.
Risk of damage to paintwork!
Refuelling
Fig. 107 Vehicle as seen from the rear right:
fuel tank flap/fuel tank flap with tank un-
screwed cap attached.
Vehicles with a fuel cap with key
–
Press the flap in the direction of the arrow
1
››› Fig. 107
.
–
Open the c
o
ver in the direction indicated
by the arrow
2
.
–
Hold onto the fuel tank cap with one hand
and unlock it using the ignition key, turning
it anti-clockwise.
–
Unscrew the tank cap anti-clockwise and
place it on top of the tank flap ››› Fig. 107
.
–
In
ser
t the pump nozzle into the fuel feed
tube as far as it will go.
The fuel tank is full as soon as the automatic
filler nozzle cuts out ›››
.
–
Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel feed
tube and place it back on the pump.
–
Screw the tank cap clockwise until it clicks
into place.
–
Hold onto the fuel tank cap with one hand
and lock it using the ignition key, turning it
clockwise.
–
Press the tank flap with your hand to close
it.
–
Check that the fuel flap is correctly closed.
Vehicles with a keyless fuel cap (the side
flap will unlock using the central locking
system)
–
Once the vehicle has been unlocked using
the central locking button, press the fuel
flap in the direction of the arrow
1
››› Fig. 107
.
–
Open the c
o
ver in the direction indicated
by the arrow
2
.
»
129
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
–
Unscrew the tank cap anti-clockwise and
place it on top of the tank flap ››› Fig. 107
.
–
Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel feed
tube as far as it will go.
The fuel tank is full as soon as the automatic
filler nozzle cuts out ››› .
–
Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel feed
tube and place it back on the pump.
–
Screw the tank cap clockwise until it clicks
into place.
–
Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear it
click into place.
–
Check that the fuel flap is properly closed.
CAUTION
●
Switch off the auxiliary heater (heater and
independent heater) before filling the tank.
●
The fuel tank is full as soon as the automat-
ic filler nozzle cuts out. Do not continue fill-
ing, as this will fill the expansion chamber.
Note
The fuel tank capacity is around 55 litres, of
which 7 litres are the reserve.
Unleaded petrol
Your vehicle must only be run on unleaded
petrol that complies with the Standard EN
228 (in Germany, also
DIN 51626 – 1, or E10
for unleaded petrol with 95 and 91 octane
rating (RON) or DIN 51626 – 2, or E5 for un-
leaded petrol with 95 and 98 RON).
Prescribed fuel – unleaded petrol (95/91
RON)
Use unleaded petrol with 95 RON. Unleaded
petrol with 91 RON can also be used, al-
though this
will result in a slight loss of pow-
er.
If, as an emergency measure, you have to fill
the tank with petrol with a lower RON to that
prescribed, use only moderate engine
speeds and light throttle. High engine speed
and full throttle can seriously damage the en-
gine! Fill up with petrol with the correct RON
as soon as possible.
Prescribed fuel – unleaded petrol (min. 95
RON)
Use unleaded petrol with 95 RON.
If unleaded petrol with 95 RON is not availa-
ble, you can fill up with petrol with 91 RON as
an emergency measure. In this case, use only
moderate engine speeds and a light throttle.
High engine speed and full throttle can seri-
ously damage the engine! Fill up with petrol
with the correct RON as soon as possible.
Petrol with a RON below 91 cannot be used,
even as an emergency measure. Risk of seri-
ously damaging the engine!
Unleaded petrol with higher RON
Unleaded petrol with a higher RON to that
prescribed can be used without limits.
In vehicles running on prescribed unleaded
petrol with 95/91 RON, there is no notable
increase in power or lower fuel consumption
when petrol with a RON higher than 95 is
used.
In vehicles running on prescribed unleaded
petrol with min. 95 RON, there is an increase
in power and a lower fuel consumption when
petrol with a RON higher than 95 is used.
Prescribed fuel – unleaded petrol (98/(95)
RON)
Use unleaded petrol with 98 RON. Unleaded
petrol with 95 RON can also be used, al-
though this will result in a slight loss of pow-
er.
If unleaded petrol with 98 or 95 RON is not
available, you can fill up with petrol with 91
RON as an emergency measure. In this case,
use only moderate engine speeds and a light
throttle. High engine speed and full throttle
can seriously damage the engine! Fill up with
130
Checking and refilling levels
petrol with the correct RON as soon as possi-
ble.
Petrol with a RON below 91
cannot be used,
ev
en a
s an emergency measure. Risk of seri-
ously damaging the engine!
Petrol additives
The quality of the fuel influences the behav-
iour, power and service life of the engine.
This is why the petrol you use should carry
suitable additives already included by the
petrol industry, free of metals. These addi-
tives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the
fuel system clean and prevent deposits from
building up in the engine.
If good-quality petrol with metal-free addi-
tives is not available or engine problems
arise, the necessary additives must be added
when refuelling ›››
.
Not all petrol additives have been shown to
be effective. The use of unsuitable petrol ad-
ditives may cause significant damage to the
engine and the catalytic converter. Metal ad-
ditives should never be used. Metal additives
may also be contained in petrol additives for
improving anti-detonation ratings or octane
ratings
›››
.
SEAT recommends “genuine Volkswagen
Group Fuel Additives for petrol engines”.
These additives can be bought at SEAT deal-
ers, where information on how to use them
can also be obtained.
CAUTION
●
Do not refuel if the filler indicates that the
fuel contains metal. LRP (lead replacement
petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of
metal additives. Using them may damage the
engine!
●
All SEAT vehicles with petrol engines can
only run on unleaded petrol. Refuelling just
once with leaded petrol disables the exhaust
system!
●
Use of petrol with a lower RON to that pre-
scribed could damage the engine compo-
nents.
●
Fuels marked as containing metal on the
garage fuel pump cannot be used. Risk of
damage to most engine parts or the exhaust
system!
●
The use of unsuitable additives in petrol
can cause damage to most engine parts or
the exhaust system.
Diesel fuel
Your vehicle can only run on diesel fuel that
complies with the Standard EN 590
(in Ger-
m
an
y, also DIN 51628, in Austria also
ÖNORM C 1590, in Russia also GOST R
52368-2005/EN 590:2004).
Winter driving – winter-grade diesel
In winter use diesel fuel that complies with
the Standard EN 590 (in Germany, also DIN
51628, in Austria also ÖNORM C 1590, in
Russia also GOST R 52368-2005/EN
590:2004). “Winter-grade diesel” still per-
forms well at -20 °C (-4 °F).
In countries with other weather conditions,
diesel is often available that behaves differ-
ently with regards to the temperature. The
authorised SEAT dealers and petrol stations
in each country will inform you on the normal
diesel fuel of the country in question.
Preheating the fuel filter
The vehicle is fitted with a glow plug system
for the fuel filter. Therefore, the reliability of
the diesel is ensured at ambient tempera-
tures of down to approximately -25 °C
(-13 °F).
Fuel additives
Fuel additives, known as “thinners” (petrol or
similar substances) should not be mixed with
the diesel fuel.
CAUTION
●
Even one tankful of diesel fuel that does
not comply with the standard could damage
engine parts, the fuel system and the ex-
haust system!
●
If fuel different to the prescribed diesel fuel
(e.g. petrol) is used by mistake, never start
the engine or switch on the ignition! Risk of
»
131
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
serious damage to the engine! Contact an au-
thorised SEAT dealer to clean the engine fuel
system.
●
Water allowed to collect in the fuel filter
can cause engine faults.
●
Your vehicle is not prepared for use of bio-
fuel (RME) and, therefore, this fuel must not
be used for refuelling or driving. The use of
biofuel (RME) could cause serious damage to
the engine or the fuel system.
Engine compartment
Introduction
Always be aware of the danger of injury and
scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire
when working in the engine compartment,
e.g. when checking and refilling fluids.
Therefore, always observe the warnings and
follow all general safety precautions. The en-
gine compartment is a dangerous area.
WARNING
●
Never open the bonnet if you see steam,
smoke or coolant escaping from the engine
compartment. Risk of scalding! Wait until no
steam or coolant can be seen before opening
the bonnet.
●
Switch off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition.
●
Engage neutral in vehicles with manual
gearbox and move the selector lever to posi-
tion P in vehicles with automatic gearbox.
●
Apply the handbrake firmly.
●
Wait for the engine to cool down.
●
For safety reasons, the bonnet must always
be closed when the vehicle is moving. There-
fore, after closing the bonnet always check
that it is properly secured.
●
Should you notice that the bonnet is not
safely secured when the vehicle is moving,
stop the vehicle immediately and close the
bonnet properly. Risk of accident!
●
Keep children away from the engine com-
partment.
●
Do not touch hot engine parts. Risk of
burns!
●
Never spill fluids on hot engine compart-
ments. These fluids can cause a fire (e.g. anti-
freeze in coolant)!
●
Take care not to cause short circuits in the
electrical system, especially when working
on the battery.
●
Never touch the radiator fan when the en-
gine is hot. The fan may start running sud-
denly!
●
Never cover the engine with additional in-
sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of
fire!
●
Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant ex-
pansion tank when the engine is hot. The
cooling system is under pressure!
●
Protect face, hands and arms from any hot
steam or hot coolant released by covering the
cap with a large, thick rag when opening the
expansion tank.
●
Do not leave any objects, such as cloths or
tools, in the engine compartment.
●
When working underneath the vehicle, se-
cure it so that it cannot roll away and support
it safely on suitable supports. The hydraulic
jack is not sufficient for this purpose. Risk of
injuries!
●
If any tests have to be performed with the
engine running, there is an extra safety risk
from rotating parts, such as the drive belt, al-
ternator and radiator fan, etc., and from the
high-voltage ignition system. You should also
note the following:
–
Never touch the electrical wiring of the
ignition system.
–
Keep away from moving engine parts
when wearing jewellery, loose clothing or
long hair. Risk of fatal injuries! All jewel-
lery must be removed, hair tied back and
close-fitting clothing worn.
●
Observe the following additional warnings
if work on the fuel system or the electrical
system is necessary.
–
Always disconnect the battery from the
on-board network.
–
Do not smoke.
–
Never work near naked flames.
–
Always keep an approved fire extinguish-
er immediately available.
132
Checking and refilling levels
CAUTION
●
When topping up fluids, make sure the cor-
rect fluid is put into the correct filler opening.
Otherwise this can cause serious malfunc-
tions or engine damage!
●
Never open the bonnet using the release
catch. Risk of damage!
For the sake of the environment
Due to the environmentally-friendly disposal
of fluids, the equipment necessary and the
knowledge required, let an authorised SEAT
dealer change fluids during service inspec-
tions of the vehicle.
Note
●
Please contact an authorised SEAT dealer
with any doubts regarding fluids.
●
Fluids of the correct specifications can be
acquired from the selection of SEAT Original
Accessories.
Opening and closing the bonnet
Fig. 108 Unlocking the bonnet.
Fig. 109 Locking the bonnet.
Opening the bonnet
–
Open the front left door.
–
Pull the lever
1
››› Fig. 108
under the dash
p
anel
in the direction indicated by the ar-
row.
Before opening the bonnet, make sure that
the windscreen wiper arms are not lifted
»
133
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
away from the glass. Otherwise the paint-
work may be damaged.
–
Pull the release catch in the direction of the
arrow
2
››› Fig. 108
and the bonnet will be
r
el
eased.
–
Hold and lift the bonnet.
–
Remove the support strut
3
››› Fig. 109
from its fastening in the direction of the ar-
row and secure the raised bonnet so that
the end of the strut hooks onto the opening
in the bonnet
4
.
Closing the bonnet
–
Lift the bonnet slightly and unhook the
support strut keeping the bonnet open and
insert it into its fastening
3
.
–
Let the bonnet drop from a height of
around 20 cm into the catch Do not press
down afterwards!
–
Check that the bonnet is correctly closed.
Checking fluid levels
Fig. 110 Diagram for the location of the various elements.
From time to time, the levels of the different
fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never
fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious
damage to the engine may be caused.
Coolant expansion tank . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Window washer water tank . . . . . . . . 139
Engine oil filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
1
2
3
Engine oil level dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Brake fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
The checking and replenishment of the serv-
ice fluids are carried out on the components
mentioned above. These operations are de-
scribed in the ››› page 132
.
4
5
6
Overview
You will find further explanations, instruc-
tions and restrictions on the technical speci-
fications as of ››› page 174
.
Note
The layout of the engine compartment is very
similar to all petrol and diesel engines.
134
Checking and refilling levels
Radiator fan
The radiator is driven by an electric motor
and controlled according to the temperature
of the coolant.
After the engine has been stopped and the
ignition switched off, the radiator fan may
continue running for around 10 minutes.
Engine oil
General notes
The engine comes with a special, multi-grade
oil that can be used all year round.
Because the use of high-quality oil is essen-
tial for the correct operation of the engine
and its long useful life, when topping up or
changing oil, use only those oils that comply
with VW standards.
The specifications (VW standards) set out in
the following page should appear on the con-
tainer of the service oil; when the container
displays the specific standards for petrol and
diesel engines together, it means that the oil
can be used for both types of engines.
We recommend that the oil change indicated
in the Maintenance Programme, be per-
formed by a technical service or specialised
workshop.
The correct oil specifications for your engine
are listed in the ››› page 136, Oil properties.
Service intervals
Service intervals can be flexible (LongLife
service) or fixed (dependent on time/dis-
tance travelled).
If the PR code that appears on the back of the
Maintenance Programme booklet is QG1, this
means that your vehicle has the LongLife
service programmed. If it has the codes QG0
or QG2, the service interval is dependent on
time/distance travelled.
Flexible service intervals (LongLife service
intervals*)
Special oils and processes have been devel-
oped which, depending on the characteris-
tics and individual driving profiles, enable
the extension of the oil change service (Long-
Life service intervals).
Because this oil is essential for extending the
service intervals, it must only be used ob-
serving the following indications:
●
Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service in-
tervals.
●
Only in exceptional circumstances, if the
engine oil level is too low
›››
page 136 and
LongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to
top up (once) with oil for fixed service inter-
vals ››› page 136
(up to a maximum of 0.5 li-
tr
e
s).
Fixed service intervals*
If your vehicle does not have the “LongLife
service interval” or it has been disabled (by
request), you may use oils for fixed service
intervals, which also appear in ››› page 136,
Oil properties. In this case, your vehicle must
be serviced after a fixed interval of 1
year/15,000 km (10,000 miles)(whatever
comes first) ››› Booklet Maintenance Pro-
gramme.
●
In exceptional circumstances, if the engine
oil level is too low ››› page 136 and you can-
not obtain the oil specified for your vehicle,
you can add a small quantity of oil conform-
ing to the specification ACEA A2 or ACEA A3
(petrol engines) or ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 (die-
sel engines) (up to 0.5 l).
Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*
The Maintenance Programme states whether
your vehicle is fitted with a diesel particulate
filter.
Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash
formation, may be used in diesel engines
equipped with particulate filter. Using other
types of oil will cause a higher soot concen-
tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There-
fore:
»
135
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
●
Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.
●
Only in exceptional circumstances, if the
engine oil level is too low ››› page 136 and
you cannot obtain the oil specified for your
vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil
(once) conforming to the VW 506 00,
VW 506 01, VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or
ACEA B3/ACEA B4 specification. (up to 0.5 l).
Oil properties
Engine type Specification
Petrol without flexible
service interval
VW 502 00/VW 504 00
Petrol with flexible serv-
ice interval (LongLife)
VW 504 00
Diesel. Engines without
Particulate filter (DPF)
VW 505 01/VW 506 01/VW
507 00
Diesel. Particulate Filter
Engines (DPF).
With or without flexible
service interval (with
and without LongLife)
a)
VW 507 00
a)
Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the
engine.
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the
engine oil. The deterioration caused by these
additives is not covered by the warranty.
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding an
engine oil that conforms to the correspond-
ing VW specifications and recommend keep-
ing it in the vehicle. This way, the correct en-
gine oil will always be available for a top-up if
needed.
Checking the engine oil level
Fig. 111 Engine oil dipsticks.
The dipstick shows the engine oil level.
››› Fig. 111
.
Chec
k
ing oil level
–
Park the vehicle on a level surface and en-
sure the engine is at operating tempera-
ture.
–
Switch the ignition off.
–
Open the bonnet.
–
Wait a few minutes for the engine oil to
flow back to the sump and remove the dip-
stick.
–
Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and in-
sert it again as far as it will go.
–
Then pull the dipstick out again and check
the oil level.
Oil level in area
A
–
Do
not t
op up oil.
Oi
l level in area
B
–
Oil can
be topped up. After topping up the
oi
l
level could be in area
A
.
Oil level in area
C
–
Oil must be topped up. After topping up,
the oil level should be in area
B
.
It is normal for the engine to consume a cer-
tain amount of oil. Depending on how you
drive and the conditions in which the vehicle
is used, oil consumption can be up to 0.5 li-
tres per 1,000 km. Oil consumption can also
be higher for the first 5,000 km (3000 miles).
You should therefore check the oil level at
regular intervals, ideally every time you fill
the tank or before setting off on a long trip.
When the engine is working hard, for in-
stance during sustained motorway cruising in
summer, when towing a trailer or caravan or
136
Checking and refilling levels
climbing on mountain passes, the oil level
should preferably be kept within area
A
,
but
no higher
.
A w
arning lamp will appear on the instrument
panel ››› page 34, Engine oil if the oil lev-
el is too low. In this case, check the oil level
as soon as possible. Top up with the required
amount of oil.
CAUTION
●
The oil level must never exceed area
A
››› Fig. 111. Risk of damage to the exhaust
sys
tem!
●
If the engine oil cannot be topped up under
the given conditions, do not drive on! Stop
the engine and seek the professional assis-
tance of an Official Service, as this could
cause serious damage to the engine.
Topping up engine oil
–
Check the engine oil level
›››
page 136,
Checking the engine oil level.
–
Unscrew the cap from the filler opening.
–
Put in the specified grade of oil 0.5 litres at
a time
›››
page 135
.
–
Chec
k
the oil level
›››
page 136.
–
Replace the oil filler cap carefully and push
the dipstick all the way in.
Changing engine oil
Engine oil must be changed with the frequen-
cy indicated in the Maintenance Programme
or according to the service interval indicator
››› page 45.
CAUTION
Do not mix engine oil with additives. Risk of
damage to the engine! Damage caused by
these products is not covered by the warran-
ty.
Note
Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into
contact with engine oil.
Coolant
General notes
The cooling system is factory-filled with an
anti-freeze product.
Coolant consists of a mixture of water and
40% anti-freeze additive. This mixture gives
the required anti-freeze protection at temper-
atures down to -25 °C (-13 °F) and protects
the cooling and heating system against cor-
rosion. It also prevents scaling and raises the
boiling point of the coolant considerably.
The coolant concentration must not be re-
duced by adding water, even in warmer sea-
sons or in warm countries. The concentration
of the anti-freeze additive in the coolant
must be at least 40 %.
If greater anti-freeze protection is required in
very cold climates, the proportion of the anti-
freeze additive can be increased, but only up
to 60% (anti-freeze protection down to ap-
proximately -40 °C (-40 °F)). Exceeding this
proportion reduces anti-freeze protection and
the cooling effect.
Coolant fluid with protection down to -35 °C
(-31 °F) is added at the factory in vehicles
destined for countries with a cold climate. In
these countries, the concentration of coolant
should always be kept above 50%.
The type of anti-freeze to be used for topping
up is indicated on the coolant tank cover
››› Fig. 112
.
CAUTION
●
Anti-freeze that does not correspond to the
correct specification may particularly affect
corrosion protection considerably.
●
Faults caused by corrosion may lead to
coolant leaks. Risk of serious engine faults!
137
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
Checking coolant level
Fig. 112 Engine compartment: coolant fluid
tank.
The coolant expansion tank is located in the
engine compartment of the vehicle.
–
Switch the ignition off.
–
Open the bonnet ››› page 132.
–
Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-
pansion tank ››› Fig. 112
. When the engine
i
s
cold, the coolant should be between
marks
B
(min.) and
A
(max.). When the
engine is hot, it may be slightly above mark
A
(max.).
If the coolant fluid level in the reservoir is too
low, this will be indicated by the red warn-
ing lamp illuminating on the general dash
panel
›››
page 35, Coolant level and tempera-
ture . However, we recommend checking
the coolant level directly in the tank.
Coolant fluid loss
Any loss of coolant normally indicates a leak.
It is not sufficient merely to top up the cool-
ant. The cooling system should be inspected
by an Official Service without delay.
CAUTION
In the event of a fault that causes the engine
to overheat, contact an authorised SEAT deal-
er immediately, as this could damage the en-
gine.
Topping up coolant
–
Switch the ignition off.
–
Wait for the engine to cool down.
–
Cover the cap on the coolant expansion
tank
›››
Fig. 112
with a cloth and
carefully
u
nscrew the cap.
–
Refill the level of coolant.
–
Screw the cap on again until it clicks into
place.
Do not use a different type of additive if the
prescribed anti-freeze additive is not availa-
ble, in the event of an emergency. In this
case, use only water and bring the coolant
concentration back up to the correct level as
soon as possible at an Official Service.
Always top up with unused coolant.
Never fill the coolant tank above mark
A
(max.) ››› Fig. 112
Excess coolant is forced
out
of
the cooling system through the over-
pressure valve in the filler cap of the expan-
sion tank when the engine heats up.
WARNING
●
The anti-freeze additive and, therefore, the
entire coolant, are a health hazard. Avoid
touching the coolant. Coolant fumes are also
a health hazard. For this reason, always store
the coolant additive in a safe place out of the
reach of children. Risk of poisoning!
●
If splashed into eyes, rinse immediately
with clean water and seek immediate medical
attention.
●
Seek immediate medical attention if the
coolant is accidentally ingested.
CAUTION
If the coolant cannot be topped up under the
given conditions, do not drive on. We rec-
ommend c
ontacting an authorised SEAT deal-
er, as this can damage the engine.
138
Checking and refilling levels
Brake fluid
Checking brake fluid level
Fig. 113 Engine compartment: brake fluid
reservoir.
The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-
gine compartment of the vehicle.
–
Switch the ignition off.
–
Open the bonnet ››› page 132.
–
Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir
››› Fig. 113
. It should be between the “MIN”
and “MAX” m
ark
s.
The fluid level drops slightly after a period of
time due to automatic compensation for
brake pad wear. This is quite normal.
However, if the level goes down noticeably in
a short time, or drops below the “MIN” mark,
there may be a leak in the brake system. If
the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too
low, this will be indicated by the warning
lamp illuminating on the instrument panel
››› page 33, Brake system .
WARNING
If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN
mark, do not continue driving. Risk of acci-
dent! Go t
o a technical service.
Changing the brake fluid
Brake fluid absorbs moisture. Therefore, it
gradually absorbs moisture from the atmos-
phere. If the water content in the brake fluid
is too high, the brake system could corrode.
The water content also reduces the boiling
point of the brake fluid.
The brake fluid must comply with one of the
following standards or specifications:
●
VW 50114
●
FMVSS 116 DOT4
WARNING
Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour
lock if the brake fluid is left in the brake sys-
tem for too long. This would seriously affect
the efficiency of the brakes and the safety of
the vehicle.
CAUTION
Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork.
Windscreen washer
Fig. 114
Engine compartment: windscreen
washer reservoir.
The container for the windscreen washer con-
tains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen or
rear window and the headlight washer sys-
tem. The container is located in the engine
compartment.
»
139
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
The
capacity
of the reservoir is approximately
3.5 litr
es; in vehicles with a headlight washer
system, it is approximately 5.4 litres
1)
.
Plain water on its own is not enough to clean
the glass and the headlights properly. We
therefore recommend using clean water with
a glass cleaning product to eliminate any
stubborn dirt (with an anti-freeze additive in
winter).
Although your vehicle has heated windscreen
washer jets, anti-freeze should always be
added to the water in winter.
Ethanol can be used where glass cleaner with
anti-freeze is unavailable. The concentration
of ethanol must be no greater than 15 %.
However, remember that anti-freeze in this
proportion only protects down to -5 °C
(+23 °F).
CAUTION
●
Never mix the windscreen washing water
with anti-freeze used for the cooling system
or other additives.
●
If the vehicle is equipped with a headlight
washer system, only mix a detergent that
does not damage polycarbonates with the
water.
Note
When topping up the fluid, do not move the
filter from the container opening, as this
could contaminate the fluid hoses and lead to
a windscreen washer malfunction.
Battery
Introduction
Warning symbols on the battery
Sym
bol
Meaning
Always wear safety glasses!
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Always wear
gloves and hearing protection!
Keep open flames, sparks, uncovered lights
and lit cigarettes away when working on the
battery!
A highly explosive mixture of gases is released
when the battery is under charge!
Keep children away from the battery!
Incorrect handling of the vehicle battery
could lead to damage. We therefore recom-
mend all work on the vehicle battery be per-
formed by an authorised SEAT dealer.
Always be aware of the danger of injury and
scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire
when working on the battery and the electri-
cal system. Therefore, always observe the
warnings and follow all general safety pre-
cautions.
WARNING
●
Battery acid is very corrosive, therefore, the
battery must be handled with the utmost
care. Wear protective gloves and protect your
eyes and skin when handling batteries. The
corrosive fumes in the air irritate and inflame
the respiratory tract and cause conjunctivitis.
It corrodes tooth enamel. Causes deep and
difficult-to-heal wounds when it comes in
contact with the skin. Repeated contact with
diluted acids causes skin disease (inflamma-
tion, ulcers and fissures). When in contact
with water, acids dilute and develop a great
deal of heat.
●
Do not tilt the battery, as acid could leak
out of the vapour vents. Protect your eyes
with glasses or a protective helmet! Risk of
blindness! If acid should splash into the
eyes, rinse the affected eye immediately for
several minutes using clean water. Then seek
medical care immediately.
1)
Valid only for certain countries. 5.4 litres for both
versions.
140
Checking and refilling levels
●
Neutralize any acid splashes on the skin or
clothing with soap solution as quickly as pos-
sible and rinse off with plenty of water. If acid
is swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor im-
mediately.
●
Keep children away from the battery.
●
Hydrogen is released and a highly explo-
sive mixture of gases is generated when the
battery is under charge. Sparks when discon-
necting or releasing cable terminals with the
ignition switched on could also cause an ex-
plosion.
●
A short circuit is produced if the battery ter-
minals are bridged, e.g. using metal objects,
cables, etc. Possible consequences of a short
circuit: melting of lead plates, battery explo-
sion and fire, splashing acid.
●
The following is forbidden while working on
the battery: fire and open flames, smoking
and activities that could produce sparks.
Avoid causing sparks when handling cables
or electrical apparatus. Risk of injury in the
event of large sparks.
●
Before working on the electrical system,
you must switch off the engine, the ignition
and all electrical components and disconnect
the cable from the negative terminal (-) of the
battery. To change a bulb, simply switch off
the corresponding light.
●
Never charge a frozen or thawed out bat-
tery. Risk of explosion and acid burns! Re-
place a frozen battery.
●
Never use the jump leads on batteries in
which the electrolyte level is too low. Risk of
explosion and acid burns!
●
Never use a damaged battery. Risk of ex-
plosion! Replace a damaged battery immedi-
ately.
CAUTION
●
Never disconnect the battery when the igni-
tion is switched on, as the electrical system
(electronic components) of the vehicle could
be damaged. When disconnecting the battery
from the vehicle electrical system, disconnect
its negative terminal (-) first. Only then may
the positive terminal (+) be disconnected.
●
When connecting the battery, first connect
the positive terminal (+) and then the nega-
tive terminal (-). The battery cables must nev-
er be connected to the wrong battery termi-
nals. Risk of burning the electrical installa-
tion!
●
Make sure the battery acid does not come
into contact with the bodywork. Risk of paint-
work damage.
●
Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight
to protect it from ultraviolet radiation.
●
If the vehicle is not used for 3 or 4 weeks,
the battery could run flat. This is because
some components use electricity even in
standby mode (e.g. control units). Prevent the
battery from running flat by disconnecting its
negative terminal or leave it charging at a low
current.
●
If you frequently use the vehicle for short
trips, the battery may not fully charge and
could run flat.
For the sake of the environment
A flat battery is particularly harmful waste for
the environment. It must therefore be dis-
posed of according to current local law.
Note
Replace a battery once it is older than 5
years.
Open the battery cover.
Fig. 115 Battery: Opening the cover.
The battery is located beneath a plastic cover
in the engine compartment.
–
Open the battery cover in the direction indi-
cated by the arrow
›››
Fig. 115
.
–
The po
s
itive terminal (+) of the battery is
connected in reverse order.
141
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
Checking battery acid level
Fig. 116 Battery: Electrolyte level indicator.
We recommend you have the acid level regu-
larly checked at an official technical service,
particularly in the following cases.
●
At high outside temperatures.
●
On long daily trips.
●
Whenever the vehicle is loaded
››› page 142, Charging the battery
.
In
v
ehicles equipped with a battery with col-
our indicator, the so-called magic eye
››› Fig. 116 changes colour to indicate the
acid level.
Air bubbles can influence the colour of the in-
dicator. Therefore, carefully knock the indica-
tor before checking the acid level.
●
Black – the acid level is correct.
●
Colourless or light yellow – acid level too
low, battery must be changed.
Note
●
The battery acid level is also regularly
checked during servicing at authorised SEAT
dealers.
●
The electrolyte level on “AGM” batteries
cannot be checked for technical reasons.
●
Vehicles equipped with the “Start-Stop”
system include a battery control unit to con-
trol the battery level for repeated engine
starting.
Winter service
At low temperatures the battery provides only
a fraction of the starting power it has at nor-
mal temperatures.
A flat battery can also freeze at temperatures
slightly below to 0 °C (32 °F).
We therefore recommend you have the bat-
tery checked and, if necessary, charged at an
official SEAT technical service before the start
of winter.
Charging the battery
A fully-charged battery is essential for relia-
ble starting.
–
Switch off the ignition and all electrical
equipment.
–
For “fast-charging” only: disconnect both
battery connection cables (first the “nega-
tive” terminal and then the “positive”).
–
Connect the charger cables to the battery
terminals (red = “positive”, black = “nega-
tive”).
–
Plug in the battery charger and switch on.
–
After charging the battery: Switch off the
battery charger and disconnect the cable.
–
Remove the charger cables.
–
If necessary, reconnect both battery cables
to the battery (first the “positive” cable,
then the “negative” cable).
When charging with a low current (e.g. with a
small battery charger), the battery does not
normally have to be disconnected. The in-
structions of the battery charger manufactur-
er must be followed.
Use a current equivalent to or lower than
10% of the battery capacity to fully charge
the battery.
Before “
fast-charging
” the battery however,
both b
attery cables must be disconnected.
“Fast-charging” a battery is dangerous and
requires a battery charger and special knowl-
edge. Fast charges should be performed by
an official technical service.
The battery caps should not be opened while
the battery is being charged.
142
Checking and refilling levels
CAUTION
In vehicles fitted with the “Start-Stop” sys-
tem, the charger cable cannot be directly con-
nected to the negative terminal of the vehicle
battery but must be attached to the engine
ground point ››› page 158.
Disconnecting and connecting the
battery
The following functions will either be inoper-
ative or will not work properly after discon-
necting and reconnecting the battery:
Function Installation
Setting the clock ››› page 32
The multifunction display data
is deleted
››› page 39
Note
We recommend having the vehicle checked by
an authorised SEAT dealer to guarantee the
correct working order of all electrical sys-
tems.
Changing the battery
A replacement battery must have the same
capacity, voltage, current rating and size as
the original. The appropriate types of battery
can be acquired from authorised SEAT deal-
ers.
We recommend having the battery changed
by an authorised SEAT dealer, where the new
battery will be correctly installed and the
original disposed of in line with regulations.
Automatic disconnection of electrical
equipment
When heavily-charging a battery, the pro-
gramme selected by the electrical system
control unit prevents the battery from auto-
matically discharging. This may result in the
following:
●
Increase in idling speed so that the alterna-
tor can supply more current to the electrical
system.
●
The performance of certain electrical com-
ponents could be limited or some may switch
off temporarily, e.g. the heated seats, the
heated rear window, the 12 V power socket.
Note
Despite any measures taken by the control
unit, the battery could drain. e.g. with the en-
gine is switched off, the key is turned in the
ignition for a long period or the side lights or
parking lights are switched on. The switching
off of certain electrical components does not
impair driving comfort and often the driver
will not even notice.
143
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
Wheels and tyres
Wheels
Introduction
WARNING
●
During the first 500 km, new tyres do not
give maximum grip, therefore you should
drive carefully. Risk of accident!
●
Never drive with damaged tyres. Risk of ac-
cident!
●
Only use wheels and tyres that been au-
thorised by SEAT or your vehicle model. Fail-
ure to do so could impair road safety. Risk of
accident!
●
Never exceed the maximum speed permit-
ted for your tyres. Risk of accident due to tyre
damage and loss of vehicle control!
●
Under-inflated tyres are submitted to great-
er rolling resistance. This means that they
can overheat at high speeds. This can cause
tread separation and even tyre blow-out.
●
For driving safety, tyres should be replaced
at least in pairs according to the axle and not
individually. The tyres with the deepest tread
should always be used on the front wheels.
●
Never fit used tyres of an unknown age or
prior use.
●
Tyres must be immediately changed at the
very latest when they have worn down to the
tread wear indicators.
●
Worn tyres reduce the necessary grip at
high speeds on damp surfaces. This could
lead to “aquaplaning” (uncontrolled vehicle
movement – “skidding” on damp surfaces).
●
Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-
placed immediately.
●
Do not use summer or winter tyres that are
more than 6 or 4 years old respectively.
●
Wheel bolts should be clean and screw
easily. However, they must never be treated
with grease or oil.
●
If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
is too low, they could loosen while the vehi-
cle is moving. Risk of accident! If the tighten-
ing torque of the wheel bolts is too high, the
bolts and threads could be damaged, leading
to the permanent deforming of the rim sup-
port surfaces.
●
Incorrectly handled wheel bolts could lead
to a wheel coming loose while the vehicle is
moving. Risk of accident!
●
Observe the national legal requirements re-
garding the use of snow tyres and chains.
CAUTION
●
Where a spare wheel that is not compatible
with the wheels fitted is used, follow the in-
structions ››› page 146.
●
The pre
scribed tightening torque for wheel
bolts on steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
●
Protect your tyres from coming into contact
with oil, grease and fuel.
●
Replace any lost valve caps immediately.
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres increases fuel consump-
tion.
Note
●
We recommend having all work on tyres
and wheels carried out by an authorised SEAT
dealer.
●
We recommend using wheels, tyres, hub
caps and snow chains from the SEAT Original
Accessories programme.
Life cycle of tyres
Fig. 117 Side view of tyres with tread wear in-
dicators.
Tread wear indicator
The base of the side of the original tyres on
your vehicle show 1.6 mm high tread wear in-
dicators ››› Fig. 117
. The position of these
144
Wheels and tyres
indicators is given on the tyre sidewalls by
the letters “TWI”, triangular symbols or other
symbols.
The useful life of the tyres depends primarily
on the following factors:
Tyre pressure values
Under-inflation or over-inflation will consider-
ably reduce the useful life of the tyres and
impair the vehicle's handling. Therefore,
check the tyre pressure, including the spare
wheel, at least once a month and before any
long journey.
Inflation pressures for summer tyres are lis-
ted on a sticker inside the fuel tank flap. The
pressures for winter tyres are 0.2 bar (2.9
psi/20 kPa) above the summer values.
Always check the pressure when the tyre is
cold. Do not reduce over-pressure in warm
tyres. The tyre pressures must be altered to
suit notable changes in the load being car-
ried.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard
braking all increase tyre wear.
Wheel balancing
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.
Various factors encountered when driving
can cause them to become unbalanced,
which results in vibration of the steering
wheel.
The wheel must be rebalanced if a new tyre is
fitted or if a tyre is repaired.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect front or rear wheel alignment cau-
ses excessive tyre wear, frequently on one
side, and also impairs vehicle safety. If tyre
wear is very irregular, contact an Official
Service.
Tyre damage
To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, only
drive over kerbs or similar obstacles slowly
and at a right angle if possible.
Check tyres and wheels regularly for damage
(punctures, cracks, blisters, deformities,
etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded
in outside of the treads.
Unusual vibration or the car pulling to one
side may indicate that one of the tyres is
damaged.
Reduce speed immediately and
s
t
op if you suspect that damage may have
occurred! Check the tyres for damage (blis-
ters, cracks, etc.). If no external damage is
visible, drive slowly and carefully to the near-
est Official Service and have the vehicle in-
spected.
Interchanging tyres
Fig. 118 Interchanging tyres.
Changing wheels around
If the wear is visibly greater on the front tyres,
they should be exchanged for the rear tyres
as shown in the diagram ››› Fig. 118
. All the
ty
r
es will then last for about the same time.
To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres
and maintain their optimum useful life, they
should be changed around every 10 000 km.
Storing tyres
When you remove the tyres, mark them in or-
der to maintain the same direction of rotation
when they are installed again.
When removed, the wheels and/or tyres
should be stored in a cool, dry and preferably
dark location. Store tyres in a vertical posi-
tion, if they are not fitted on wheel rims.
145
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
Replacing tyres and wheels
All four wheels must be fitted only with tyres
of the same type, size and the same tread
pattern.
The correct tyre/wheel combinations speci-
fied for your vehicle are listed in its docu-
mentation.
Note for Italy: A SEAT Service Centre should
be con
sulted whether different sized wheels
or tyres to those originally fitted by SEAT may
be fitted, as well as the combinations al-
lowed between the front axle (axle 1) and
back axle (axle 2).
Understanding the tyre designations makes
it easier to choose the correct tyres. The tyre
designation is marked on the sidewall. For
example.
195/55 R 15 85 H
This contains the following information:
195 Tyre width in mm
55 Height/width ratio in %
R identifying tyre construction letter –
Radial
15 Rim diameter in inches
85 Load rating code
H Speed rating code letter
The tyres are subject to the following maxi-
mum speed limits
:
Speed rating code
letter
Maximum speed limit
Q 160 km/h (99 mph)
R 170 km/h (106 mph)
S 180 km/h (112 mph)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
U 200 km/h (124 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
W 270 km/h (168 mph)
The
manufacturing date
is also indicated on
the ty
re sidewall (possibly only on the inner
side of the wheel).
DOT … 27 12…
means, for example, that the tyre was pro-
duced in the 27th week of 2012.
Follow the instructions ››› page 146 if you
only have a temporary spare wheel.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
The direction of rotation is indicated by the
arrows on the tyre sidewall. The direction of
rotation indicated must be respected. This
guarantees optimum grip and helps avoid ex-
cessive noise, wear and aquaplaning.
In the event of a flat tyre, a spare wheel with
an undetermined tread pattern or an oppo-
site tread pattern must be used and you must
drive carefully, as in these cases the tyres no
longer offer maximum performance.
Spare wheel
Spare wheel location*
Fig. 119 Luggage compartment: spare wheel.
The spare wheel is housed in a well under
the floor panel in the luggage compartment
and is secured by a special bolt ››› Fig. 119
.
T
ak
e out the tool box before removing the
spare wheel.
146
Wheels and tyres
The tyre pressure of the spare wheel must be
checked (preferably whenever the tyre pres-
sure is checked – see sticker on fuel tank flap
››› page 144
) to ensure the spare wheel re-
m
ain
s ready for use.
If the spare wheel is not the same size or de-
sign as the tyres that are mounted on the car
(for example if the car has winter tyres or
tyres with direction tread), only use the spare
tyre for a short period of time in the event of
breakdown and drive with the corresponding
care ›››
.
It must be replaced as soon as possible for a
wheel with a normal size and finish.
Temporary spare wheel
If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary
spare wheel, there will be a warning sign on
the rim of the wheel.
Follow the instructions below when driving
with this wheel fitted.
●
After fitting the wheel, the warning sign
must not be covered.
●
Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph)
with the spare wheel and take great care
while driving. Avoid heavy acceleration, hard
braking and fast cornering.
●
The tyre pressure is the same as that of the
standard tyres.
●
Only use this spare wheel to reach the
nearest Official Service, as it is not designed
for permanent use.
WARNING
●
Under no circumstances must damaged
spare wheels be used.
●
If the spare wheel is different in size or de-
sign to the tyres currently fitted, never drive
faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). Avoid heavy
acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering.
CAUTION
Follow the instructions given on the tempora-
ry spare wheel label.
Note
The tyre pressure of the spare wheel must al-
ways correspond to the highest pressure pre-
scribed for the model of vehicle in question.
Tyre control systems
Tyre pressure*
Fig. 120 Tyre pressure adjustment switch.
The tyre pressure monitoring system uses
ABS sensors to compare the revolutions and
the circumference of each wheel. Should the
circumference of any wheel change, the
warning lamp on the general dash panel
››› page 38
will light up and an audible warn-
in
g w
ill be heard.
Tyre circumference may change if:
●
Tyre pressure is too low
●
Tyre structure is damaged
●
Vehicle load not evenly distributed
●
wheels on one axle are subjected to greater
load, (e.g. driving with trailer, uphill, down-
hill);
●
Snow chains are fitted
»
147
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
●
The temporary spare wheel is fitted
●
One wheel on the axle has been changed
Basic system settings
Should the tyre pressure change or if one or
more wheels are changed or the position of
the wheel on the vehicle is changed, e.g.
changing round the front and rear wheels, or
where a warning lamp lights up when driv-
ing, the system must be adjusted as follows:
●
Inflate all tyres to the prescribed pressures
››› page 144
.
●
Sw
it
ch the ignition on.
●
Hold the
››› Fig. 120 button down for
at least 2 seconds. The warning lamp will
light up when the button is pressed . The
system memory is also deleted and a new
calibration process will begin, which is indi-
cated by an audible warning and the warning
lamp switching off.
●
If the warning lamp remains lit and does
not switch off, not even once the basic set-
ting process is complete, this indicates a
fault in the system. Contact an Official Serv-
ice.
The warning lamp lights up
If the pressure on at least one tyre is signifi-
cantly lower than the pressure set by the driv-
er, the warning lamp ››› will light up.
The warning lamp flashes
If the warning lamp flashes, there is a fault in
the system. Contact a specialised service to
have it fixed.
WARNING
●
If the warning lamp lights up, slow down
immediately and avoid any severe braking or
steering manoeuvres. Stop and check the
tyres and their pressure as soon as possible.
●
Under certain conditions (e.g. sporty driv-
ing style, driving on loose surfaces or in win-
ter) the warning lamp may take a while to
light up or m
ay remain switched off.
●
Despite the tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem, the driver remains responsible for main-
taining the correct tyre pressure. You must
therefore check the tyre pressure often.
Note
●
The tyre pressure monitoring system is not
a replacement for regularly checking the tyre
pressure, as it is unable to recognise an even
drop in pressure.
●
The tyre pressure monitoring system is un-
able to warn of a sudden drop in tyre pres-
sure, e.g. a puncture. In this case, try to stop
the vehicle carefully with no severe braking
or steering manoeuvres.
●
To ensure the tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem works correctly, the basic setting must
be performed every 10 000 km (6000 miles)
or once a year.
Winter service
Winter tyres
Winter tyres will significantly improve han-
dling of the vehicle in winter road conditions.
The design of summer tyres (width, rubber
compound, tread pattern) gives less grip at
temperatures below +7 °C (45 °F), on ice and
snow. This applies particularly to vehicles
equipped with wide section tyres or high
speed ty
res (code letters H or V on the side-
wall).
In order to preserve the performance of the
vehicle as much as possible, winter tyres
must be fitted on all four wheels, the mini-
mum depth of the tread must be 4 mm and
the maximum age must be 4 years.
You can use winter tyres of a lower speed rat-
ing if the maximum speed limit of these tyres
will not be exceeded, even if the maximum
speed limit for the vehicle is higher.
For the sake of the environment
Summer tyres should be fitted again in time,
as they give better handling on roads free of
snow and ice and at temperatures over +7 °C
(45 °F). Summer tyres have a shorter braking
distance, produce less rolling noise and do
not wear as quickly. They also reduce fuel
consumption.
148
Emergencies
Snow chains
Snow chains must only be used on the front
wheels.
In winter road conditions, snow chains not
only help to improve grip but also improve
the braking capacity.
For technical reasons snow chains may only
be used on tyres with the following wheel
rim/tyre combinations.
Rim size Rim offset Tyre size
5J x 14
a)
35 mm 175/70
6J x 15
b)
38 mm 185/60
6J x 15
b)
38 mm 195/55
a)
Only use snow chains with fine-pitch links and lock no greater
than 9 mm.
b)
Only use snow chains with fine-pitch links and lock no greater
than 13 mm.
Remove the wheel trims before fitting snow
chains.
CAUTION
Chains must be removed when roads are free
of snow. Otherwise they will impair handling,
damage the tyres and wear out very quickly.
Emergencies
Emergency equipment
First-aid kit and warning triangle*
Fig. 121 Location of the warning triangle.
The warning triangle, measuring max.
436 x 45 x 32 mm, can be secured to the lin-
ing on the rear of the luggage compartment
with rubber straps ››› Fig. 121.
WARNING
The first-aid kit and fire extinguisher must be
properly secured so that they are not catapul-
ted through the vehicle during driving and
braking manoeuvres or in the event of an ac-
cident. Risk of injury.
Note
●
Observe the expiry date of the contents of
the first aid kit.
●
We recommend you use the first-aid kit and
the warning triangle from the SEAT Original
Accessories programme available in author-
ised SEAT dealers.
Fire extinguisher*
Read the instructions given on the fire extin-
guisher carefully.
The fire extinguisher must be checked once a
year by an authorised person (take the appli-
cable legal regulations into account).
WARNING
The fire extinguisher must be properly se-
cured so that it is not catapulted through the
vehicle, causing injuries, during driving and
braking manoeuvres or in the event of an ac-
cident.
Note
●
The fire extinguisher must comply with lo-
cal legal requirements.
●
Observe the expiry date of the fire extin-
guisher. The fire extinguisher may not work
properly if used after the expiry date.
149
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
Vehicle tool kit*
Fig. 122 Vehicle tool kit.
The vehicle tool kit and the jack are stored in
a box on the spare wheel or in the spare
wheel well. There is also enough space for
the towing bracket ball coupling. The box is
strapped to the spare wheel with tape.
The vehicle tool kit includes the following
parts (depending on equipment):
Screwdriver
Adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts
Towline anchorage
Wire hook for removing hub caps
Jack
Box spanner for wheel bolts
Clip for wheel bolt cover
Spare set of bulbs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Before stowing the jack again, screw down
the arm as far as it will go.
WARNING
●
The factory-supplied jack is only designed
for changing wheels on this model of vehicle.
On no account attempt to use it for lighting
heavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of injury!
●
Make sure that the vehicle tools are stored
properly in the luggage compartment.
Note
●
Make sure the box always remains strap-
ped to the spare wheel with tape.
●
The jack does not generally require any
maintenance. If required, it should be
greased using universal type grease.
Changing a wheel
Introduction
WARNING
●
If you have a puncture in moving traffic,
switch on the hazard warning lights and
place the warning triangle at the obligatory
distance. Observe applicable local legal regu-
lations. This is for your own safety and that of
other drivers.
●
If you have a flat tyre, stop the vehicle as
far away as possible from moving traffic. Stop
on flat, solid ground.
●
If you have to change the tyre on a gradi-
ent, block the wheel opposite the wheel be-
ing changed by placing a stone or similar ob-
ject under it to prevent the vehicle from roll-
ing away unexpectedly.
●
If the vehicle has been fitted with tyres or
alloys that are different to those fitted in
manufacture, the instructions ››› page 146,
Replacing tyres and wheels must be followed.
●
Always raise the vehicle with the doors
closed.
●
Never place parts of your body, e.g. arms
and legs, underneath the vehicle when it is
supported only by the jack.
●
Secure the base of the jack with suitable
supports so that it cannot slip. The jack could
slide if the ground below it is soft and slip-
pery and the vehicle could slip off it. There-
fore, place the jack on a firm surface or use a
large, stable base. On a slippery surface, e.g.
tile, use a non-slip base such as a rubber
mat.
●
Never start the engine when the vehicle is
jacked. Risk of injury.
●
The jack should only be used in the correct
jacking points.
CAUTION
●
The prescribed tightening torque for wheel
bolts on steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
150
Emergencies
●
If the anti-theft wheel bolt is overly tight-
ened, this could damage the bolt and the
adapter.
Note
●
The set of anti-theft wheel bolts or the
adapter are available from authorised SEAT
dealers.
●
Please observe the relevant local legal reg-
ulations when changing the wheel.
Preparation work
Some preparation is required before chang-
ing a wheel:
–
If you have a flat tyre, stop the vehicle as
far away as possible from moving traffic.
The surface must be horizontal.
–
All vehicle occupants should leave the ve-
hicle
. Vehicle occupants should wait in a
s
af
e place, e.g. behind the roadside crash
barrier) while the wheel is being changed.
–
Switch off the ignition and engage neutral
or move the selector lever on the automatic
gearbox to position P.
–
Apply the handbrake firmly.
–
If towing a trailer, unhitch it.
–
Take the vehicle tool kit ››› page 150 and
the spare wheel ››› page 150 out of the lug-
gage compartment.
Wheel trim
Removing
–
Place the hook from the vehicle tool kit on
the reinforced edge of the wheel trim.
–
Insert the box spanner through the hook,
supporting it on the tyre and remove the
wheel trim.
Fitting
–
First press the wheel trim onto the wheel at
the cut out designed for the valve. Then
press the wheel trim on both sides in the
direction of the valve so that it fits correctly
in place around all the perimeter.
CAUTION
●
Press down by hand, do not hit the wheel
trim! Knocking it sharply, particularly at
points where the wheel trim has not yet been
inserted, could result in damage to the wheel
trim guiding and centring elements.
●
Before fitting the trim on a steel wheel at-
tached with an anti-theft wheel bolt, make
sure the bolt is in the hole in the valve area
››› page 154, Anti-theft wheel bolts*.
●
Where trim is fitted at a later date, ensure
enough air inflow is guaranteed in order to
cool the brake system.
Wheel bolt caps
Fig. 123 Pull off the wheel bolt cap.
Removing
–
Insert the plastic clip into the cap until the
inner retaining notches on the clips touch
the collar of the cap and then remove it
››› Fig. 123
.
Fittin
g
–
In
sert the caps as far as they will go over
the wheel bolts.
The wheel bolt caps are stored in a box on
the spare wheel or in the spare wheel well.
151
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
Wheel bolts
The wheel bolts are m
atched to the rims.
When installing different wheels, e.g. to fit
light alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres,
it is important to use the correct wheel bolts
with the right length and correctly shaped
bolt heads. This is essential for a secure fit of
the wheels and for proper operation of the
brake system.
Changing a wheel
If possible, change the wheel on a level sur-
face.
–
Pull off the hub cap
›››
page 151 or the
wheel bolt covers
›››
page 151.
–
First loosen the anti-theft wheel bolts and
then the other wheel bolts
›››
page 152.
–
Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be
changed is no longer touching the ground
›››
page 153
.
–
R
emo
ve the wheel bolts and place them on
a clean surface (cloth, paper, etc.).
–
Take off the wheel.
–
Lift the spare wheel into position and tight-
en the wheel bolts lightly.
–
Lower the vehicle.
–
Tighten the wheel bolts firmly in diagonal
sequence with the box spanner and then
the anti-theft wheel bolt ››› page 152.
–
Replace the hub cap and/or the bolt cov-
ers.
Note
●
All bolts must be clean and turn easily.
●
Never grease or oil the wheel bolts!
●
Note the direction of rotation when putting
on a tyre with a directional tread pattern
››› page 144.
After changing a wheel
Tasks that must be carried out after changing
a wheel:
–
Place the wheel with the defective tyre in
the spare wheel well and secure it using a
special bolt
›››
page 146
.
–
P
ut
the vehicle tools back in their storage
location.
–
Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted
spare wheel as soon as possible.
–
Have the tightening torque of the wheel
bolts checked as soon as possible with a
torque wrench.
–
Have the flat tyre replaced or ask an Official
Service about the possibility of repair.
Note
●
If you notice that the wheel bolts are rusty
and difficult to turn when changing a wheel,
they must be replaced before having the
tightening torque checked.
●
Drive carefully and at moderate speeds un-
til the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
has been checked.
Loosening and tightening wheel bolts
Fig. 124 Changing a wheel: loosen the wheel
bolts.
152
Emergencies
Loosening wheel bolts
–
Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over
the wheel bolt
1)
.
–
Grip the end of the box spanner and turn
the wheel bolt about one
turn anti-clock-
w
i
se ››› Fig. 124.
Tightening wheel bolts
–
Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over
the wheel bolt
1)
.
–
Grip the box spanner as close to the end as
possible and tighten the bolt firmly by turn-
ing clockwise.
WARNING
The wheel bolts should only be loosened
slightly (about one turn) before raising the
vehicle with the jack. Risk of accident!
Note
If the wheel bolt is very tight, it may be pos-
sible to loosen it by pushing down the end of
the box spanner carefully with your foot. Hold
on to the vehicle for support and take care
not to slip.
Lifting the vehicle
Fig. 125 Changing a wheel: jack position
points.
Fig. 126 Fitting the jack.
To place the jack, locate the jacking point un-
der the door sill closest to the wheel to be
changed ››› Fig. 125
. The jacking point is di-
r
ectly
underneath the stamp on the door sill.
–
Turn the crank handle on the jack to wind it
up under the jacking point until its claw is
directly below the jacking point of the door
sill.
»
1)
The corresponding adapter is required to unscrew
or tighten the anti-theft wheel bolts ››› page 154.
153
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
–
Adjust the jack so that its claw surrounds
the jacking point on the door sill ››› Fig. 126
- B underneath the stamp on the door sill.
–
Make sure that the base of the jack is en-
tirely supported on a flat surface and that it
is vertical ››› Fig. 126
to the point where the
c
l
aw surrounds the jacking point on the
door sill.
–
Continue to wind up the jack using the
crank handle until the defective wheel is
clear off the ground.
Anti-theft wheel bolts*
Fig. 127 Anti-theft wheel bolt with adapter.
On vehicles fitted with anti-theft wheel bolts
(one bolt per wheel) these bolts can only be
loosened or tightened using a factory-sup-
plied adapter.
–
Pull off the hub cap or bolt cover.
–
Insert the adapter
B
››› Fig. 127
with its
t
oothed s
ide as far as it will go on the inte-
rior toothing of the anti-theft wheel bolt
A
so that only the outer hexagonal is protrud-
ing.
–
Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over
adapter
B
.
–
Loosen or firmly tighten the wheel bolt
››› page 152
.
–
Af
t
er removing the adapter, replace the hub
cap or the anti-theft wheel bolt cover.
–
Have the tightening torque of the wheel
bolts checked as soon as possible with a
torque wrench.
Note down the code number stamped on the
front of the adapter or on the front of the anti-
theft wheel bolt. You will need this number to
obtain a spare adapter from the SEAT original
accessories programme.
We recommend you always carry the wheel
bolt adapter in the vehicle. It should be stor-
ed in the vehicle tool kit.
Tyre repairs
TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*
The Tyre Mobility System is stored in a box
under the carpet in the boot.
Using the Tyre Mobility System you can relia-
bly seal tyres damaged by foreign bodies,
provided that cuts or punctures are no larger
than approx. 4 mm in diameter. Do not re-
move the foreign bodies, e.g. bolts or nails,
from the tyre!
The tyre must be repaired immediately.
The repair made using the Tyre Mobility Sys-
tem
under no circumstances replaces perm
a-
nent
tyre repair and should only be used to
drive to the nearest official service.
The Tyre Mobility System kit shall not be
used:
●
If the wheel rim has been damaged,
●
when the outside temperature is below
-20 °C (-4 °F),
●
on slashes or punctures larger than 4 mm,
●
if the sidewall of the wheel has been dam-
aged,
●
If you have been driving with very low tyre
pressure or a completely flat tyre
●
If the best-before date on the air can has
expired
WARNING
Read and observe the safety warnings ››› in
Introduction on page 150.
●
A tyr
e filled with sealant does not have the
same performance properties as a conven-
tional tyre.
154
Emergencies
●
Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).
●
Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and
fast cornering.
●
Check the tyre pressure after 10 minutes of
driving!
●
The sealant is harmful to health and must
be immediately rinsed from affected skin.
For the sake of the environment
Used or out-of-date sealant must be disposed
of in line with environmental protection regu-
lations.
Note
●
Observe the usage instructions provided by
the snow chain manufacturer.
●
A new can of sealant can be acquired from
the selection of SEAT Original Accessories.
●
Change the tyre repaired using the Tyre
Mobility System as soon as possible or ask
an official service about the possibility of re-
pairing it for you.
Components of the Tyre Mobility
System*
Fig. 128 Contents of the Tyre Mobility System.
The Tyre Mobility System contains the follow-
ing components:
An adapter to fit and remove the valve
Sticker indicating the speed: “max. 80
km/h” or “max. 50 mph”
Flexible filling hose with cap
Compressor
Flexible tyre inflating hose
Tyre pressure gauge
Air release screw
ON/OFF button
12 V cable connector ››› page 79
Can of sealant
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Spare valve
The valve extractor
1
››› Fig. 128
has a slot
in its
lo
wer end that fits onto the valve insert.
This is used to remove the valve insert from
the tyre and to replace it. This is also valid for
the spare valve insert
11
.
Work prior to using the Tyre Mobility
System
The following jobs must be performed before
using the Tyre Mobility System:
–
If you have a flat tyre, stop the vehicle well
away from moving traffic. Stop on flat, solid
ground.
–
All vehicle occupants should leave the ve-
hicle
. Vehicle occupants should wait in a
s
af
e place (e.g. behind the roadside crash
barrier) while the wheel is being changed.
–
Switch off the ignition and engage neutral
or move the selector lever on the automatic
gearbox to position P.
–
Apply the handbrake firmly.
–
Check whether the tyre can be repaired us-
ing the Tyre Mobility System
›››
page 154.
–
If towing a trailer, unhitch it.
–
Remove the Tyre Mobility System from the
boot.
»
11
155
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
–
Fix the sticker
2
››› Fig. 128
›
›› p
age 155
onto the dash panel where the driver will
see it.
–
Do not remove the foreign body, e.g. bolts
or nails, from the tyre.
–
Unscrew the tyre valve cap.
–
Using the valve extractor
1
, unscrew the
valve insert and place it on a clean surface
(cloth, paper, etc.)
Filling and inflating the tyre
Filling the tyre
–
Shake the tyre sealant can
10
››› Fig. 128
››› page 155
thoroughly several times.
–
Att
ac
h the flexible filling hose
3
onto the
can
10
. The foil sealing the can will be au-
tomatically pierced.
–
Remove the cap from the flexible filling
hose
3
and insert the open end as far as it
will go into the tyre valve.
–
Hold the can
10
upside down and fill the
complete contents of the can into the tyre.
–
Remove the empty can from the tyre.
–
Screw the valve insert back into the tyre
valve using the valve extractor
1
.
Inflating the tyre
–
Screw the tyre filling hose
5
››› Fig. 128
››› page 155 firmly onto the tyre valve.
–
Make sure that the bleed screw
7
is
closed.
–
Start the vehicle engine and leave it run-
ning.
–
Plug connector
9
into the 12-volt power
socket.
–
Turn on the air compressor with switch
8
.
–
Leave the air compressor running until the
tyre pressure has reached 2.0 -2.5 bar
(29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). The max. operat-
ing time for the compressor is 8 minutes
››› !
–
Switch the compressor off.
–
When an air pressure of 2.0-2.5 bar
(29-36 psi/200-250 kPa) cannot be
reached, unscrew the flexible tube
5
from
the tyre valve.
–
Drive the vehicle approx. 10 metres for-
wards or backwards, so that the sealant
can “spread evenly” in the tyre.
–
Screw the flexible hose from the air com-
pressor
5
back onto the tyre valve and re-
peat the inflation process.
–
If the pressure is still lower than specified,
the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre can-
not be repaired using the tyre sealant kit
››› .
–
Switch the compressor off.
–
Unscrew the flexible hose
5
from the tyre
valve.
When a tyre pressure of 2.0-2.5 bar
(29-36 psi/200-250 kPa) is reached, you can
continue driving at a max. speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph).
Check the tyre pressure after 10 minutes of
driving ››› page 157
.
WARNING
●
The flexible tyre filling hose and the air
compressor may heat up during the filling
process. Risk of injury!
●
Do not place the hot flexible tyre filling
hose or hot air compressor on top of flamma-
ble materials. Risk of fire!
●
If the tyre cannot be inflated to a minimum
pressure of 2.0 bar (29 psi/200 kPa), then
the tyre is too badly damaged. The sealing
product is unable to seal the tyre . Do not
continue driving and obtain professional as-
sistance.
CAUTION
Do not use the air compressor for longer than
8 minutes at a time. Risk of overheating! Be-
fore using the air compressor again, leave it
to cool down for several minutes.
156
Emergencies
Check after 10 minutes of driving
Check the tyre pressure after 10 minutes of
driving!
If the tyre pressure is less than 1.3 bar
(18.8 psi/130 kPa):
–
Do not drive on! The tyr
e cannot be suffi-
ciently filled using the tyre repair kit.
–
See professional assistance.
If the tyre pressure is greater than 1.3 bar
(18.8 psi/130 kPa):
–
Correct the tyre pressure again to the cor-
rect value (see inside of the fuel tank flap).
–
Carefully drive to the nearest specialised
workshop at a maximum speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph).
Jump-starting
Introduction
If the engine fails to start because of a dis-
charged battery, the battery can be connec-
ted to the battery of another vehicle to start
the engine. Suitable jump leads are required.
Both batteries need to have nominal voltage
of 12 V. The capacity
(Ah) of the back-up bat-
t
er
y should not be notably less than the
drained battery.
Jump leads
The jump leads must be heavy enough to car-
ry the starter current and must be fitted with
insulated battery clamps. Refer to the instruc-
tions given by the manufacturer.
Positive cable – usually red
Negative cable – usually black
WARNING
●
A flat battery can also freeze at tempera-
tures slightly below to 0 °C (32 °F). Do not at-
tempt to start the vehicle with a frozen bat-
tery. Risk of explosion!
●
Please note the safety warnings referring to
working in the engine compartment
››› page 132.
●
The non-ins
ulated parts of the battery
clamps must not be allowed to touch. Addi-
tionally, the jump lead attached to the posi-
tive battery terminal must not touch metal
parts of the vehicle. Risk of short circuit!
●
Do not connect the negative lead to the
negative terminal of the discharged battery.
In the event of sparks when starting the en-
gine, the explosive gas given off by the bat-
tery could catch fire.
●
Position the jump leads in such a way that
they cannot come into contact with any mov-
ing parts in the engine compartment.
●
Do not bend over the battery. Risk of acid
burns!
●
The screw plugs on the battery cells must
be screwed in firmly.
●
Keep sources of fire (flames, lit cigarettes,
etc.) away from the battery. - Risk of explo-
sion!
●
Never use the jump leads on batteries in
which the electrolyte level is too low. Risk of
explosion and acid burns.
Note
●
The vehicles must not touch each other, as
electricity could flow as soon as the positive
terminals are connected.
●
The discharged battery must be properly
connected to the vehicle electrical system.
●
The jump leads should be checked in a spe-
cialist vehicle battery shop.
157
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
How to jump start: description
Fig. 129 Diagram of connections for vehicles
without Start Stop system
Fig. 130 Diagram of connections for vehicles
with Start Stop system
Jump lead terminal connections
1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles
››› .
2. Connect one end of the red
jump lead to
the po
s
itive
+
terminal of the vehicle
with the flat battery
A
››› Fig. 129
.
3.
C
onnect the other end of the red jump
lead to the positive terminal
+
in the ve-
hicle providing assistance
B
.
4. For vehicles without Start-Stop system:
connect one end of the black jump lead to
the negative terminal
–
of the vehicle
providing the current
B
››› Fig. 129
.
–
F
or
vehicles with Start-Stop system: con-
nect one end of the black jump lead
X
to a
suitable ground terminal, to a solid piece of
metal in the engine block, or to the engine
block itself ››› Fig. 130
.
5.
C
onnect the other end of the black jump
lead
X
to a solid metal component bolted
to the engine block or to the engine block
itself of the vehicle with the flat battery.
Do not connect it to a point near the bat-
tery
A
.
6. Position the leads in such a way that they
cannot come into contact with any moving
parts in the engine compartment.
Starting
7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
boosting battery and let it run at idling
speed.
8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat
battery and wait 2 or 3 minutes until the
engine is “running”.
Removing the jump leads
9. Before you remove the jump leads, switch
off the dipped beam headlights (if they
are switched on).
10.Turn on the heater blower and heated rear
window in the vehicle with the flat battery.
This helps minimise voltage peaks which
are generated when the leads are discon-
nected.
11.
When the engine is running, disconnect
the l
e
ads in reverse order to the details
given above.
Connect the battery clamps so they have
good metal-to-metal contact with the battery
terminals.
If the engine fails to start, switch off the start-
er after about 10 seconds and try again after
about 1 minute.
WARNING
●
Please note the safety warnings referring to
working in the engine compartment
››› page 132.
●
The batt
ery providing assistance must have
the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and
approximately the same capacity (see imprint
158
Emergencies
on battery). Failure to comply could result in
an explosion.
●
Never use jump leads when one of the bat-
teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even af-
ter the battery has thawed, battery acid could
leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery
freezes, it should be replaced.
●
Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes
away from batteries, danger of explosion.
Failure to comply could result in an explo-
sion.
●
Observe the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the jump leads.
●
Do not connect the negative cable from the
other vehicle directly to the negative terminal
of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the
battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of
explosion.
●
Do not attach the negative cable from the
other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to
the brake line.
●
The non-insulated parts of the battery
clamps must not be allowed to touch. The
jump lead attached to the positive battery
terminal must not touch metal parts of the ve-
hicle, this can cause a short circuit.
●
Position the leads in such a way that they
cannot come into contact with any moving
parts in the engine compartment.
●
Do not lean on the batteries. This could re-
sult in chemical burns.
Note
The vehicles must not touch each other, oth-
erwise electricity could flow as soon as the
positive terminals are connected.
Towing the vehicle
Introduction
Vehicles with manual gearbox can be towed
using a towbar or towrope. They can also be
towed with either the front or rear wheels lif-
ted off the road.
Vehicles with automatic gearbox can be tow-
ed using a towbar or towrope. They can also
be towed with the front wheels lifted off the
road. If the vehicle is towed with the rear
wheels lifted off the road the automatic gear-
box will be damaged!
It is safer to tow a vehicle with a towbar. A
towrope
should only be used if you do not
h
av
e a towbar.
Follow the instructions below when towing a
vehicle:
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
–
Engage the clutch very gently when starting
to move or on vehicles with automatic gear-
box press the accelerator carefully.
–
On vehicles with a manual gearbox, the
towrope must be taut before driving off.
Maximum towing speed is 50 km/h (31
mph).
Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle
–
The ignition should be switched on so that
the steering wheel lock is not engaged and
the turn signals, horn and windscreen wip-
ers and washers can be used.
–
Put the gear lever in neutral or move the se-
lector lever to position N (automatic gear-
box).
The brake servo and power steering only
work when the engine is running. Considera-
bly more effort is required on the brake pedal
and steering wheel when the engine is
switched off.
Ensure the towrope remains taut at all times
when towing.
CAUTION
●
Do not tow-start the engine. Risk of engine
damage! In vehicles with a catalytic convert-
er, fuel that has not been burned could reach
the catalytic converter and catch fire in it.
This could damage and destroy the catalytic
converter. You may use the battery from an-
other vehicle to help you start your engine
››› page 158.
»
159
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
●
If, due to a fault, there is no oil in the gear-
box, the car may only be towed with the
driven wheels lifted clear of the road and
transported on a special vehicle transporter
or trailer.
●
If normal towing is not possible or if the ve-
hicle is to be towed for further than 50 km,
the vehicle must be transported on a special
vehicle transporter or trailer.
●
The towrope should be slightly elastic to
reduce the load on both vehicles during tow-
ing. It is advisable to use a towrope made of
synthetic fibre or similar material only.
●
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle
and always take care to avoid jerking the tow-
rope. When towing on a loose surface there is
always a risk of overloading and damaging
the anchorage points.
●
Attach the towrope or towbar only to the
towline anchorages or to the removable tow-
ing bracket ››› page 114, or ››› p
age 161.
Note
●
We recommend you use the towrope or tow-
bar available in the SEAT Original Accessories
programme from authorised SEAT dealers.
●
Towing a vehicle requires a certain degree
of practical skill. Both drivers should be fa-
miliar with the technique required for towing.
Inexperienced drivers should not attempt to
tow away another vehicle or to have their ve-
hicle towed.
●
Note the legal regulations concerning tow-
ing, particularly those regarding the signal-
ling of the towed and towing vehicle.
●
The towrope must not be twisted, as under
certain circumstances this could unscrew the
front towline anchorage.
Towline anchorage
Fig. 131 Front bumper: towline anchorage
cover/fitting.
Fitting and detaching the cover
–
Press on the left of the cover as indicated
by the arrow ››› Fig. 131 .
–
Pull on the cover to remove it from the front
bumper.
–
To refit the cover after unscrewing the tow-
line anchorage, fit the cover and press
down on its right-hand side. The cover
must be securely engaged.
Fitting and detaching the towline anchorage
–
Screw in the towline anchorage anti-clock-
wise by hand as far as it will go ››› Fig. 131
.
To tighten the towline anchorage, we recom-
mend using the box spanner, the towing eye
from another vehicle or a similar object that
can be inserted through the anchorage.
–
Unscrew the towline anchorage by turning
it clockwise.
CAUTION
The towline anchorage must be screwed in as
far as it will go. Otherwise there is a risk of
the screw connection shearing off during
towing or tow-starting!
160
Emergencies
Rear Towline anchorage
Fig. 132 Rear towline anchorage.
The rear towline anchorage is under the rear
bumper, on the right.
Emergency locking and
unlocking
Manual locking
Fig. 133 Rear door: manual locking
On the front of a door with no lock cylinder
there is an emergency locking device that is
only visible when the door is open.
Locking
–
Remove the cap
A
››› Fig. 133
.
–
In
ser
t the key in the slot
B
and turn it in
the direction of the arrow until horizontal
(on the other direction on the right-hand
door).
–
Replace the cap.
Once the door has been locked, it can no lon-
ger be opened from the outside. The door
can be opened from the inside by pulling the
door handle.
Manual release of the rear lid
Fig. 134 Manual release of the rear lid
In the event of a fault in the central locking
system, the rear lid can be released manual-
ly.
Release
–
Fold down the backrest of the rear seat
››› page 75
.
–
In
ser
t the car key in the opening in the mat.
–
Move it towards the arrow to release the
rear lid.
–
Open the rear lid.
161
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
Manual release of the selector lever
Fig. 135 Manual release of the selector lever.
If there is a fault in the power system to the
electronic selector lever lock system (flat bat-
tery, blown fuse) or the system itself is faulty,
the selector lever cannot be moved from po-
sition
P
in the normal manner, which pre-
v
ents the vehicle from being moved. The se-
lector lever must be unlocked using the man-
ual release.
–
Apply the handbrake.
–
Pull gently on both sides at the front of the
selector lever cover.
–
Also loosen the cover at the rear.
–
Press the yellow plastic part with your fin-
ger in the direction indicated by the arrow
›››
Fig. 135.
–
Press the interlock button on the selector
lever knob at the same time and move the
selector lever to position N (if the selector
lever is moved back to position P, it will
lock again).
Changing the wiper blades
Changing the windscreen wiper
blades
Fig. 136 Windscreen wiper blades.
Set the windscreen wiper arms to the service
position before changing the blades.
Service position for changing wiper blades
–
Close the bonnet.
–
Switch the ignition on and off.
–
Press the lever to position
4
››› Fig. 56
››› page 69, the windscreen wiper arms are
set to the service position.
Taking off the wiper blade
–
Lift the windscreen wiper arm away from
the glass moving the blade slightly in the
direction of the arm – arrow
A
››› Fig. 136
.
–
Ho
l
d the top of the windscreen wiper arm
with one hand.
–
Unlock the catch
1
with the other hand
and remove the blade in the direction of ar-
row
B
.
Fitting the wiper blade
–
Slide the blade fully until it clicks into posi-
tion.
–
Check that the wiper is correctly secured.
–
Fold the windscreen wiper arm back down
onto the glass.
–
Switch the ignition on and press the lever
to position
4
››› Fig. 56 ››› page 69, the
windscreen wiper arms are set to the basic
position.
162
Fuses and bulbs
Changing the rear window wiper
blade*
Fig. 137 Rear window wiper blade.
Taking off the wiper blade
–
Lift the rear window wiper arm away from
the glass moving the blade slightly in the
direction of the arm – arrow
A
››› Fig. 137
.
–
Ho
l
d the top of the rear window wiper arm
with one hand.
–
Unlock the catch
1
with the other hand
and remove the blade in the direction of ar-
row
B
.
Fitting the wiper blade
–
Slide the blade fully until it clicks into posi-
tion.
–
Check that the wiper is correctly secured.
–
Fold the rear window wiper arm back down
onto the glass.
Fuses and bulbs
Fuses
Introduction
Due to the constant updating of vehicles,
fuse assignments based on equipment and
the use of the same fuse for various electrical
components, it is not possible to provide an
up-to-date summary of the fuse positions for
the electrical components at the time this
manual was printed. For detailed information
about the fuse positions, please consult a
technical service.
In general, a fuse can be assigned to various
electrical components. Likewise, an electrical
component can be protected by several
fuses.
Only replace fuses when the cause of the
problem has been solved. If a newly inserted
fuse blows after a short time, you must have
the electrical system checked by a special-
ised workshop as soon as possible.
Additional information and warnings:
●
Working in the engine compartment
›››
page 132
.
WARNING
The high voltages in the electrical system can
give serious electrical shocks, causing burns
and even death!
●
Never touch the electrical wiring of the igni-
tion system.
●
Take care not to cause short circuits in the
electrical system.
WARNING
Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or
bridging a current circuit without fuses can
cause a fire and serious injury.
●
Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only
replace fuses with a fuse of the same amper-
age (same colour and markings) and size.
●
Never repair a fuse.
●
Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, staple
or similar.
CAUTION
●
To prevent damage to the vehicle's electric
system, before replacing a fuse always turn
off the ignition, the lights and all electrical
elements and remove the key from the igni-
tion.
●
If you replace a fuse with higher-rating
fuse, you could cause damage to another part
of the electrical system.
●
Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-
vent the entry of dust or humidity as they can
damage the electrical system.
»
163
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
Note
●
One component may have more than one
fuse.
●
Several components may run on a single
fuse.
Fuses on the dash panel
Fig. 138 Bottom of the dash panel: fuse cov-
er.
Fig. 139 Diagram of the fuse box to the
left/right of the steering wheel
Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same
amperage (same colour and markings) and
size.
Identifying fuses situated below the driver-
side dash panel by colours
Colour Amp rating
Purple 3
Light brown 5
Brown 7.5
Red 10
Blue 15
Yellow 20
White or trans-
parent
25
Colour Amp rating
Green 30
Orange 40
Opening and closing the fuse box
●
Carefully tilt the cover in the direction indi-
cated by the arrow and remove it ››› Fig. 138.
●
After changing the fuse, replace the cover
on the dash panel in the direction opposite
that is indicated by the arrow so that the cov-
er tabs fit into the slots on the dash panel.
Subsequently, press down on the cover to
close.
CAUTION
●
Always carefully remove the fuse box cov-
ers and refit them correctly to avoid problems
with your vehicle.
●
Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid
the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humid-
ity inside fuse boxes can cause damage to
the electrical system.
Note
In the vehicle, there are more fuses than
those indicated in this chapter. These should
only be changed by a specialised workshop.
164
Fuses and bulbs
Changing fuses in the engine
compartment
Fig. 140 Battery: fuse cover (version 1).
Fig. 141 Battery: fuse cover (version 2).
●
Press the flexible tabs on the fuse box cov-
er in the direction indicated by the arrows
1
›››
Fig. 140
.
●
R
emo
ve the cover by sliding it in the direc-
tion indicated by arrow
2
.
●
Use a flat-headed screwdriver to unlock the
holes
3
.
●
Open the cover in the direction indicated
by the arrow
4
.
Replacing a blown fuse
Fig. 142 Image of a blown fuse
Preparation
●
Switch off the ignition, lights and all elec-
trical equipment.
●
Open the corresponding fuse box
››› page 164
.
Identif
y
ing a blown fuse
A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured
››› Fig. 142.
Point a lamp at the fuse. This will make it
easier to see if the fuse is blown.
To replace a fuse
●
Remove the fuse.
●
Replace the blown fuse by one with an
identical amperage rating (same colour and
markings) and identical size ›››
.
»
165
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
●
Replace the cover again or close the fuse
box lid.
CAUTION
If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse,
you could cause damage to another part of
the electrical system.
Changing bulbs
Introduction
Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of
practical skill. If in doubt, we recommend you
have defective bulbs changed by a special-
ised service or, in case of an emergency,
seek professional assistance.
●
Switch off the ignition and all of the lights
before changing a bulb.
●
Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with
your bare hands. The fingerprints left on the
glass will vaporise as a result of the heat gen-
erated by the bulb, reducing bulb life and
causing condensation on the reflector sur-
face, thus reducing effectiveness.
●
A bulb must only be replaced by one of the
same type. The type is indicated on the bulb,
either on the glass part or on the base.
●
There is a storage area for the bulb box in
the spare wheel well or below the carpet in
the luggage compartment.
The light source used for each function is lis-
ted below:
Double headlights
H7 Long Life
H7
W5W Long Life
PY21W NA
P21W Super Long Life
WARNING
●
Take particular care when working on com-
ponents in the engine compartment if the en-
gine is warm. Risk of burns.
●
Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The
glass can break when you touch the bulb,
causing injury.
●
The high voltage element of gas discharge
bulbs* (xenon light) must be handled correct-
ly. Otherwise, there is a risk of death.
●
When changing bulbs, please take care not
to injure yourself on sharp parts in the head-
light housing.
CAUTION
●
Remove the ignition key before working on
the electric system. Otherwise, a short circuit
could occur.
●
Switch off the lights and the parking light
before changing a bulb.
Dipped beam:
Main beam:
Side lights:
Turn signals:
Daytime driving lights:
For the sake of the environment
Please ask your specialist retailer how to dis-
pose of used bulbs in the proper manner.
Note
●
Depending on weather conditions (cold or
wet), the front lights, the fog lights, the rear
lights and the turn signals may be temporari-
ly misted. This has no influence on the useful
life of the lighting system. By switching on
the lights, the area through which the beam
of light is projected will quickly be demisted.
However, the edges may continue to be mis-
ted.
●
Please check at regular intervals that all
lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on
your vehicle is functioning properly. This is
not only in the interest of your own safety,
but also that of all other road users.
●
Before changing a bulb, make sure you
have the correct new bulb.
●
Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with
your bare hands, use a cloth or paper towel
instead. Otherwise, the fingerprints left on
the glass will vaporise as a result of the heat
generated by the bulb, they will be deposited
on the reflector and damage its surface.
166
Fuses and bulbs
Double headlight bulbs
Fig. 143 Main headlight bulbs.
Installation position of double headlight
bulbs
Side lights
Main beam headlights
Dipped beam headlights
Turn signal lights
Daylight
A
B
C
D
E
Changing side light bulbs
Fig. 144 Changing side light bulbs.
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Remove the protective cover ››› Fig. 144
.
–
R
emo
ve the bulb holder ››› Fig. 144
1
by
pulling it outwards.
–
Remove the bulb by pulling it out and fit
the new one.
–
Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
–
Fit the protective cover. Make sure that the
cover fits correctly on the housing during
operation.
–
Check whether the new bulb is working.
Changing main beam headlight bulbs
Fig. 145 Changing main beam headlight
bulbs.
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Remove the protective cover.
–
Remove connector ››› Fig. 145
1
by pulling
outward.
–
Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so
that it fits correctly into the recess on the
reflector.
–
Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
–
Fit the protective cover. Make sure that the
cover fits correctly on the housing during
operation.
–
Check whether the new bulb is working.
167
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
Changing the dipped headlight bulb
Fig. 146 Changing dipped beam headlight
bulbs: wheel housing.
Fig. 147 Changing dipped beam headlight
bulbs.
–
Turn the wheel for access to the wheel
housing cover and remove the cover
››› Fig. 146
.
–
R
emo
ve the protective cover from the head-
light ››› Fig. 147.
–
Remove connector ››› Fig. 147
1
by pulling
outward.
–
Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 147
2
pressing clockwise and inwards.
–
Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so
that the lug on the base fits into the recess
on the reflector.
–
Fit the connector.
–
Fit the protective cover. Make sure that the
cover fits correctly on the housing during
operation.
–
Replace the wheel housing cover.
–
Check whether the new bulb is working.
Changing turn signal bulbs
Fig. 148 Changing turn signal bulbs.
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 148
1
anti-
clockwise and remove it.
–
Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb
holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the
same time.
–
Fit the replacement bulb in the bulb holder
and turn clockwise as far as it will go.
–
Check whether the new bulb is working.
Changing daytime driving light bulbs
Fig. 149 Changing daytime driving light
bulbs.
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 149
1
anti-
clockwise and remove it.
–
Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb
holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the
same time.
168
Fuses and bulbs
–
Fit the replacement bulb in the bulb holder
and turn clockwise as far as it will go.
–
Check whether the new bulb is working.
Changing front fog light bulbs
Front fog light bulb
Fig. 150 Front fog light.
Fig. 151 Front fog light.
–
Remove the bolt ››› Fig. 150
1
from the fog
light grille with a screwdriver.
–
Subsequently, remove the clips located on
the edge of the grille with gentle leverage.
–
Remove the bolts (3x) ››› Fig. 151
2
to re-
move the fog light.
–
Remove the metal clip situated on the up-
per part of the fog light by pulling towards
the exterior of the vehicle ››› Fig. 151
3
.
Remove the bulb holder
Fig. 152 Front fog light.
–
Remove connector ››› Fig. 152
1
from the
bulb.
–
Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 152
2
anti-
clockwise and pull.
–
Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb
holder and turning it counter-clockwise at
the same time.
–
Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
–
Check that the bulb works properly.
Changing bulbs for rear lights
(in side panel)
Removing tail light
Fig. 153 Remove the rear light unit from side
panel.
Check which of the bulbs is defective.
–
Open the luggage compartment to access
the rainduct area.
»
169
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
–
Take the screwdriver or a Torx 20 key (T20)
from the vehicle tool kit and loosen (turn-
ing anti-clockwise) and remove the two re-
taining screws that secure the front of the
light ››› Fig. 153
1
, taking care not to lose
them.
–
Pull the rear light unit backward
(››› Fig. 153
2
) to remove the light from its
housing.
Remove the bulb holder
Fig. 154 Light connector at the rear of the
rear light unit.
Fig. 155 Retaining screws on reverse side of
rear light unit.
–
Disconnect the light connector
A
››› Fig. 154
by moving its side levers (ar-
r
o
ws) and pulling the connector outwards.
–
Place the light on a level, horizontal surface
on top of a soft cloth so as not to scratch
the outer glass.
–
Unscrew the four retaining screws from the
bulb holder anti-clockwise using a screw-
driver or a Torx 20 key (T20) from the vehi-
cle tool kit ››› Fig. 155. Take care not to lose
the bulb holder retaining screws.
Changing bulbs
Fig. 156 Position of the bulbs in the bulb
holder
The bulbs are secured with a bayonet fasten-
er. The table below gives an overview of the
bulb positions.
–
Lightly press the defective bulb into the
bulb holder, then turn it anti-clockwise and
remove it.
–
Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb
holder and turn it clockwise as far as it will
go.
–
Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from
the glass part of the bulb.
–
Check that the new bulb works properly.
–
Replace the bulb holder.
–
Screw in the bulb holder using the four
screws, turning them clockwise.
170
Fuses and bulbs
Position of the bulbs
››› Fig. 156 Bulb function
A
Turn signals: PY21W NA LL
B
Side lights-brake lights: P21/5W
C
Side lights: P21/5W
Note
Check the condition of the seal. If damaged, a
replacement can be acquired from an Official
Service.
Fitting rear light
Fig. 157 Fit the tail light unit.
Fig. 158 Fit the tail light unit.
–
Make sure the connector is correctly in
place.
–
Press the rear light unit backwards (driving
direction) by fitting the fastenings into the
rubber mountings ››› Fig. 157
A
.
–
Take the screwdriver or a Torx 20 key (T20)
from the vehicle tool kit and tighten (turn-
ing clockwise ››› Fig. 158
) the two retaining
s
c
rews that secure the front of the light.
Changing rear lights (in rear
lid)
Remove the bulb holder
Fig. 159 Remove the cover from the boot lid.
»
171
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Advice
Fig. 160 Remove the lamp holder
The rear lid must be open to change the
bulbs.
You can access the bulb holder for the inner
tail lights through the inside of the rear lid.
–
Check which of the bulbs is defective.
–
Open the cover to access the lights, turning
it by hand in the direction indicated by the
arrows.
–
Access the lights by disconnecting the con-
nector
1
››› Fig. 160
and u
nscrewing
the b
ulb holder ››› Fig. 160 . Take care not
to lose the bulb holder retaining screw.
–
Change the bulbs ››› page 172.
Changing bulbs
Fig. 161 Position of the bulbs in the bulb
holder
The bulbs are secured with a bayonet fasten-
er. The table below gives an overview of the
bulbs ››› table on page 172
.
–
Lightly
pr
ess the defective bulb into the
bulb holder, then turn it anti-clockwise and
remove it.
–
Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb
holder and turn it clockwise as far as it will
go.
–
Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from
the glass part of the bulb.
–
Check that the new bulb works properly.
–
Re-install the bulb holder ››› page 172.
–
Screw in the bulb holder.
Position of the bulbs
››› Fig. 161 Bulb function
A
Reverse light P21W
B
Side lights R5W LL
C
Fog lights P21W
Note
One of the two sides may not be fitted with a
fog light, depending on the country and type
of driving. In this case, the hole for the light
is covered.
Fitting the bulb holder
–
Position the bulb holder on the tail light
and align it so that it is securely seated.
–
Screw in the bulb holder using the corre-
sponding screw.
–
Make sure the connector is correctly in
place.
–
Close the inner trim cover.
172
Fuses and bulbs
Note
Check the condition of the seal. If damaged, a
replacement can be acquired from an Official
Service.
Changing bulb for the number
plate light
Remove the bulb holder
Fig. 162 Removing number plate light
Fig. 163 Changing the bulb.
–
Unscrew the screws to remove the bulb
››› Fig. 162
.
–
R
emo
ve the bulb, moving it in the direction
of the arrow and outwards ››› Fig. 163.
–
Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
173
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Important information
Important
The information in the vehicle documentation
always takes precedence over the informa-
tion in this Instruction Manual.
All technical specifications provided in this
documentation are valid for the standard
model in Spain. The vehicle data card inclu-
ded in the Maintenance Programme or the
vehicle registration documents shows which
engine is installed in the vehicle.
The figures may be different depending
whether additional equipment is fitted, for
different models, for special vehicles and for
other countries.
Abbreviations used in the Technical
Specifications section
Abbrevia-
tion
Meaning
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
PS
Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly
used to denote engine power.
Abbrevia-
tion
Meaning
rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
litres per
100 km
Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km
(70 miles).
g/km
Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per
km (mile) travelled.
CO
2
Carbon dioxide
CN
Cetane number, indication of the diesel
combustion power.
RON
Research octane number, indication of
the knock resistance of petrol.
Vehicle identification data on the data
sticker
Fig. 164 Data sticker.
Fig. 165 Identification plate
Vehicle data sticker
The vehicle data sticker ››› Fig. 164
is located
on the boot
floor and i
s also attached to the
Maintenance Programme.
The following information is provided on the
vehicle data sticker:
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Vehicle model
Identifying letters of the gearbox/number
of the original paint finish/Interior equip-
ment number/engine power/engine
identifying letter
Partial description of the vehicle
Weight in running order
Fuel consumption (in litres per 100 km) –
urban/on the motorway/combined
Combined CO
2
emissions (g/km)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
174
Technical specifications
Type plate
The type plate ››› Fig. 165
is located at the
bott
om of
the front driver side door pillar be-
tween the front and rear doors.
The type plate indicates the following
weights:
Total permitted weight of the vehicle
when loaded
Maximum authorised weight of the vehi-
cle with a trailer, when the vehicle oper-
ates as a tractor
Maximum permitted load of the front axle
Maximum permitted load of the rear axle
Weight in running order
The weight in running order only has one ap-
proximate value. This value corresponds to
the minimum operative weight of the vehicle
without additional equipment that increases
its weight, i.e. air conditioning, spare wheel,
towing bracket.
The running order weight also includes 75 kg
of the weight of the driver and service fluids,
in addition to a fuel tank at 90% capacity.
From the difference between the total permit-
ted weight in running order the approximate
carrying capacity can be calculated ›››
.
The carrying capacity must include:
●
occupants,
8
9
10
11
●
all pieces of equipment and other weights,
●
roof loads including the roof rack,
●
equipment that is not included in the run-
ning order weight,
●
when using the towing bracket, the draw-
bar load (max. 50 kg)
Calculating fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions according to the ECE regulations
and the EU specifications
Calculation of fuel consumption for urban
driving begins when cold-starting the engine.
Then, normal city driving is simulated.
In calculating extra-urban driving fuel con-
sumption, braking and acceleration is done
in all gears, as in daily use of the vehicle.
Driving speed varies within a range of 0 and
120 km/h (75 mph).
The consumption value in combined driving
is composed of 37% of the value of urban
driving and 63% of the value of extra-urban
driving.
WARNING
The maximum permitted weight values must
not be exceeded – Risk of an accident and
damage to the vehicle!
Note
●
If you wish to calculate the exact weight of
your vehicle please contact a SEAT dealer.
●
Depending on the volume of equipment,
driving style, road conditions, weather condi-
tions and the condition of the vehicle, con-
sumption values can differ from the theoreti-
cal values stated here.
Information on fuel
consumption
Fuel consumption
The consumption and emission details
shown on the vehicle data sticker differ from
one vehicle to another.
Vehicle fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions
appear on the vehicle data sticker in the
spare wheel well, inside the boot and on the
rear cover of the Maintenance Programme.
The fuel consumption and CO
2
emission val-
ues refer to the weight category assigned to
your vehicle according to the engine and
gearbox combination, as well as the specific
equipment fitted, and is only used to com-
pare between the different models.
The fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions do
not depend only on the performance of the
vehicle, they can also differ from the estab-
lished values depending on other factors
such as driving style, road conditions, traffic
conditions, environmental conditions, load
and number of passengers.
»
175
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Technical specifications
Calculation of fuel consumption
The consumption values have been calcula-
ted based on measurements performed or
supervised by certified CE laboratories ac-
cording to the latest version of directives
715/2007/EC and 80/1268/CEE (for more in-
formation consult the European Union Publi-
cations Office at EUR-Lex: © European Union,
http://eur-lex.europa.eu/en/index.htm) and
are valid for the kerb weight indicated for the
vehicle.
Note
In practice, and considering all the factors
mentioned here, consumption values can dif-
fer from those calculated in the current Euro-
pean regulations.
Weights
Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a
fuel tank filled to 90% capacity and without
optional extras. The figure quoted includes
75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver.
Special versions, optional equipment fittings
or retro-fitting accessories will increase the
weight of the vehicle
›››
.
WARNING
●
Please note that the centre of gravity may
shift when transporting heavy objects; this
may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-
cident. Always adjust your speed and driving
style to suit road conditions and require-
ments.
●
Never exceed the gross axle weight rating
or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the per-
missible axle load or the permissible total
weight is exceeded, the driving characteris-
tics of the vehicle may change, which could
lead to accidents, injuries and damage to the
vehicle.
Towing a trailer
Trailer weights
Trailer weight
The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap-
proved are selected in intensive trials accord-
ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap-
proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in
the
EU
for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50
mph) (in c
ertain circumstances up to 100
km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be different
in other countries. All data in the official vehi-
cle documentation takes precedence over
these data at all times ›››
.
Drawbar loads
The
maximum
permitted drawbar load on the
b
all joint of the towing bracket must not ex-
ceed 50 kg.
In the interest of road safety, we recommend
that you always tow approaching the maxi-
mum drawbar load. The response of the trail-
er on the road will be poor, if the drawbar
load is too small.
If the maximum permissible drawbar load
cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and
light-weight single axle trailers or tandem
axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1
metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer
weight is legally required for the drawbar
load.
WARNING
●
For safety reasons, do not exceed the 80
km/h (50 mph) limit. This is also valid in
countries where higher speeds are permitted.
●
Never exceed the maximum trailer weights
or the drawbar load. If the permissible axle
load or the permissible total weight is excee-
ded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle
may change, leading to accidents, injuries
and damage to the vehicle.
176
Technical specifications
Wheels
Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheel
bolts
Tyre pressures
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can
be found on the inside of the fuel tank flap.
The tyre pressure values given there are for
cold tyres. Do not reduce the slightly raised
pre
ssures of warm tyres ›››
.
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front
wheels
.
C
on
sult the section “wheels” of this manual.
Wheel bolts
After the wheels have been changed, the
tightening torque of the wheel bolts should
be checked as soon as possible with a torque
wrench
›››
. The tightening torque for steel
and alloy wheels is 120
Nm.
WARNING
●
Check the tyre pressure at least once per
month. Checking the tyre pressure is very im-
portant. If the tyre pressure is too high or too
low, there is an increased danger of accidents
- particularly at high speeds.
●
If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
is too low, they could loosen while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight-
ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and
threads can be damaged.
Note
We recommend that you ask your Technical
Service for information about appropriate
wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
177
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Technical specifications
Engine data
Petrol engine 1.2 55 kW (75 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
55 (75)/5,400 112/3,750 3/1,198 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Performance
Top speed (km/h) 175 (5)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 9.3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 13.9
Consumption (l/100 km)/ CO
2
(g/km)
Urban cycle 8.1/187
Extra-urban cycle 4.6/107
Combined 5.9/137
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1,595
Weight in running order (with driver) 1,135
Gross front axle weight / Gross rear axle weight 800 / 830
Permitted roof load 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 560
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 950
178
Technical specifications
Performance
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 750
179
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 63 kW (85 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
63 (85)/4,800 160/1,500-3,500 4/1,197 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Performance
Top speed (km/h) 183 (5)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.8
Consumption (l/100 km)/ CO
2
(g/km) Ecomotive
Urban cycle 6.5/151 5.9/137
Extra-urban cycle 4.4/103 4.3/100
Combined 5.1/119 4.9/114
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1,615
Weight in running order (with driver) 1,155
Gross front axle weight / Gross rear axle weight 820 / 830
Permitted roof load 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 570
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,100
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 900
180
Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 77 kW (105 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
77 (105)/5,000 175/1,550-4,100 4/1,197 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Performance
Top speed (km/h) 195 (5)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.3
Consumption (l/100 km)/ CO
2
(g/km) without Start-Stop with Start-Stop
with Start-Stop +
185 tyre
Urban cycle 6.9/160 6.4/149 6.3/146
Extra-urban cycle 4.6/107 4.3/100 4.2/98
Combined 5.4/125 5.1/118 5/116
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1,635
Weight in running order (with driver) 1,175
Gross front axle weight / Gross rear axle weight 840 / 830
Permitted roof load 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 580
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,100
181
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.6 77 kW (105 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
77 (105)/5,600 153/3,800 4/1,598 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Performance AQ
Top speed (km/h) 193 (5) 192 (5)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.2 8.1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.6 11.9
Consumption (l/100 km)/ CO
2
(g/km)
Urban cycle 8.9/212 10.2/244
Extra-urban cycle 4.9/116 6/143
Combined 6.4/152 7.5/180
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1,615 1,655
Weight in running order (with driver) 1,155 1,195
Gross front axle weight / Gross rear axle weight 820 / 830 820 / 830
Permitted roof load 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 570 590
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,200 1,200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,000 1,000
182
Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.4 90 kW (122 PS) Automatic
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
90 (122)/5,000 200/1,500-4,000 4/1,390 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Performance
Top speed (km/h) 206 (6)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.4
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.5
Consumption (l/100 km)/ CO
2
(g/km)
Urban cycle 7.4/172
Extra-urban cycle 4.8/112
Combined 5.8/134
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1,690
Weight in running order (with driver) 1,230
Gross front axle weight / Gross rear axle weight 900 / 820
Permitted roof load 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 610
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,200
183
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Technical specifications
Diesel Engine 1.6 CR 66 kW (90 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
66 (90)/4,200 230/1,500-2,500 4/1,598 Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN
a)
a)
Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.
Performance Manual Automatic
Top speed (km/h) 184 (5) 184 (6)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.9 7.9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 12.0 12.2
Consumption (l/100 km)/ CO
2
(g/km)
Urban cycle 5.6/147 5.6/146
Extra-urban cycle 3.7/97 3.9/103
Combined 4.4/114 4.5/118
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1,725 1,745
Weight in running order (with driver) 1,265 1,285
Gross front axle weight / Gross rear axle weight 930 / 830 950 / 830
Permitted roof load 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 630 640
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,200 1,200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,200 1,200
184
Technical specifications
Diesel Engine 1.6 CR 77 kW (105 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
77 (105)/4,400 250/1,500-2,500 4/1,598 Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN
a)
a)
Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.
Performance without Start-Stop with Start-Stop
with Start-Stop +
185 tyre
Ecomotive
Top speed (km/h) 190 (5) 190 (4-5)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.1 7
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.4 10.3
Consumption (l/100 km)/ CO
2
(g/km)
Urban cycle 6/158 4.9/129 4.8/126 4.5/118
Extra-urban cycle 3.7/98 3.5/92 3.4/90 3.4/90
Combined 4.6/120 4/106 3.9/104 3.8/99
Weights (in kg)
Gross vehicle weight 1,725 1,723
Weight in running order (with driver) 1,265 1,263
Gross front axle weight / Gross rear axle weight 930 / 830 930 / 830
Permitted roof load 75 75
Maximum trailer weights (in kg)
Trailer without brakes 630 –
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1,200 –
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,200 –
185
Technical specifications
AdviceOperationSafety
Technical specifications
Dimensions
Length/Width (mm) 4,482/1,715
Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,466
Front and rear projections (mm) 876/1,004
Wheelbase (mm) 2,602
Turning radius (m) 10.2
Front/rear
a)
track width (mm) 1,463/1,500
a)
This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
Capacities
Capacities
Fuel tank 55 litres
Windscreen washer fluid
container with headlight
washer
3.5 litres/ 5.4 litres
Tyre pressure
Summer tyres:
Correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the
inside of the fuel tank flap.
Winter tyres:
The pressure of these tyres is 0.2 bar higher than that of
summer tyres (2.9 psi / 20 kPa).
186
Index
Index
A
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Adjusting the seat belt height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Adjustment
seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
see radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Airbags
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
air conditioning
air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Air conditioning
air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 92
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Air recirculation
manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Anti-lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Aspects to take into account before starting the
vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Assistance system
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Assistance systems
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 108
parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Audible signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Auto-check system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Automatic disconnection of electrical equip-
ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
back-up programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Driving programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
manual release of the selector lever . . . . . . . . 162
parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Automatic headlight control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
B
Back-up
automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Battery
automatic disconnection of electrical equip-
ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
checking acid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
winter service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Bonnet
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Boot
hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
retaining elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
retaining nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
see boot hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Boot hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
automatic lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Boot lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
automatic lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Brake fluid
checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Brakes
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Button on driver's door
electric window opening and closing . . . . . . . . 60
187
Index
C
Car computer
see multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Care of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Care of vehicle
automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
cleaning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
cleaning wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
high-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
leatherette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
natural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
polishing of paintwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
washing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Changing
a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Changing bulbs
double headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
front fog light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Changing gear
recommended gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Checking
battery acid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Checking fluid levels
engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Child seat
Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
leatherette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
natural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Cleaning chrome
see care of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Climatronic
air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Computer
see multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Controls and displays
summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
coolant
temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints . . 8
Correct adjustment of rear seat head restraints
In-use and non-use positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Correct sitting position
front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
D
Dangers in not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
see dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Data sticker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Daytime driving light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Defrosting rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Diesel
fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
see fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Diesel fuel
winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
188
Index
Disconnect the airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Display
service interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Disposal
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Door
childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Drink holder
Drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Driver
see
Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 7, 8
Driv
in
g
driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Economically/with Respect for the Environ-
ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Emission values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Driving abroad
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Driving Economically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Driving the vehicle with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Driving with Respect for the Environment . . . . . 106
E
EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Electric window opening and closing
button on driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
switch on driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
switch on rear door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Electric windows
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
roll-back function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Roll-back function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Electric window switch
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Emergency
jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
repairing of tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Emission values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Engine
run-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
extend boot lock limit
see boot hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
F
Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Filling with fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Front fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
see fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
unleaded petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Fuel: saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Fuses
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
G
Gauge
coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
189
Index
H
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Hazard
warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . . . 13
Head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Headlights
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
defrosting windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
HHC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Hill-hold control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
How to jump start description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
I
Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Informative display
see MAXI DOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Interior
ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
J
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
K
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
L
Lever
main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Lights
AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Daytime driving light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
dipped beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
front fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Front fog lights with cornering function . . . . . . 64
hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
parking lights on both sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
range control of main lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
switching lights on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Load compartment in the luggage compartment
see
Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . 81
L
o
ading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Locking
central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Locking a gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Luggage carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Luggage compartment
Category N1 vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
manual release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Manual release of the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
see also Loading the luggage compartment . . 81
M
Make-up
mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Manual
door locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
release of the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Release of the selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Manual gearbox
Gear lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
MAXI DOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Mirror
exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Interior rear vision mirror with manual anti-
dazzle adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Multi-function display
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
190
Index
Multifunction display
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
N
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
O
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
see engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Oil level
checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
On board computer
see multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Opening and closing from the inside . . . . . . . . . . 56
Opening and closing windows electrically
button on driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
switch on driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
switch on rear door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Overview of the engine compartment . . . . . . . . . 134
P
Paint
see paint damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Paint damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Parking
Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Passenger
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 7, 8
Ped
als . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Petrol
see fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Polishing paintwork
see care of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Positioning seat belts
during pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Preheating – warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Preventing damage to the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Puncture repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
R
Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Radiator fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Radio reception
aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
rear vision mirror
exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Rear vision mirror
Interior rear vision mirror with manual anti-
dazzle adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Recommended gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Recommended gear display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Remote control key
replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Roof carrier
attachment points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Run-in
engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
the first 1,500 km . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Running in
brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
the tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
S
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Safe Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Safety first . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Safety instructions
front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Safety notes
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Seat adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Seat belt
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Seat belt control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Seat belt protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
191
Index
Seat belt tensioner
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Seats
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Selector lever
see selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Service display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Setting
clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Settings
exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Interior rear vision mirror with manual anti-
dazzle adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
light range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Sitting position
driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Sitting position for vehicle occupants . . . . . . . . . . 6
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 177
Spare
changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
see speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Start-Stop
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Starting with jump leads
jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Storage
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 85
Summary
control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
see sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
T
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Temperature selection
heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
see automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Topping up
coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Tow-away protection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Traction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Transport
roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Transporting children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Trip counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Tyre Mobility System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
see Tyre Mobility System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Tyre repair set
see Tyre Mobility System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Tyres
see Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Tyre tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
U
Underbody sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Unlocking
central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Unlocking and locking from the inside . . . . . . . . . 56
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
V
Vehicle care
door lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Vehicle interior monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Vehicle status
see Auto-check system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
enter the number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
W
Warning symbols
see warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
192
Index
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
washing with high-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 124
Waxing
see care of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Wearing suitable shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
loosening and tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Wheels and tyres
changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
interchanging tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
life cycle of tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
replacing tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Why assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . . . 16
Why should head restraints be correctly adjusted? 8
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 16
Windows
de-icing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
see electric window opening and closing . . . . . 60
Windscreen
see radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Windscreen washer
checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Windscreen washer fluid
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Windscreen washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Windscreen wiper
jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Windscreen wipers
changing the rear window wiper blade . . . . . . 163
changing windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . 162
control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
winter driving
diesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Winter service
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Cleaning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Winter tyres
see Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Wipe interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
193
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-
stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason
no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.14
About this manual
This manual contains a description of the
equipment supplied with the vehicle at the
time this manual was published. Some of the
units described herein will not be available
until a later date or are only available in cer-
tain markets.
Because this is a general manual for the
ALTEA range, some of the equipment and
functions that are described in this manual
are not included in all types or variants of the
model; they may vary or be modified depend-
ing on the technical requirements and on the
market; this is in no way deceptive advertis-
ing.
The illustrations are intended as a general
guide and may vary from the equipment fitted
in your vehicle in some details.
The steering indications (left, right, forward,
reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the
normal driving movements of the vehicle ex-
cept when otherwise indicated.
*
The equipment marked with an aster-
isk* is fitted as standard only in certain
versions, and is only supplied as op-
tional extras for some versions, or are
only offered in certain countries.
® All registered marks are indicated with
®. Although the copyright symbol does
not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.
>> The section is continued on the follow-
ing page.
WARNING
Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-
mation on safety. They warn you about possi-
ble dangers of accident or injury.
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to
potential sources of damage to your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-
vant information concerning environmental
protection.
Note
Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-
nal information.
This manual is divided into five large parts,
which are:
1. Safety
2. Operation
3. Tips
4. Technical data
5. Alphabetical index
At the end of this manual, there is a detailed
alphabetical index that will help you quickly
find the information you require.
OWNER’S
MANUAL
Toledo
6JA012720BC
Inglés
6JA012720BC (11.14)
Toledo Inglés (11.14)
